06 General Procedures

July 2005
6-1 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F)

General Procedures & Information
6 General Procedures/Information
GP 1 to GP 9
GP 1 Diagnostics Entry, Facilities and Exit ..................................................................... 6-3
GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files................................................................................ 6-7
GP 3 Service Information................................................................................................ 6-9
GP 4 Machine Software .................................................................................................. 6-11
GP 5 Portable Work Station and Tools ........................................................................... 6-18
GP 6 Screw Usage.......................................................................................................... 6-20
GP 7 Miscellaneous Checks ........................................................................................... 6-21
GP 8 Special Tools and Consumables ........................................................................... 6-22
GP 9 IOT PWB Spare Parts Strategy ............................................................................. 6-23
GP 10 to GP 18
GP 10 How to Check a Motor ......................................................................................... 6-25
GP 11 How to Check a Sensor ....................................................................................... 6-27
GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch ..................................................................... 6-28
GP 13 How to Check a Switch ........................................................................................ 6-29
GP 14 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the Machine.................................. 6-30
GP 15 How to Set the Machine Configuration ................................................................ 6-31
GP 16 How to Safely Lift or Move Heavy Modules ......................................................... 6-32
GP 17 High Frequency Service Items............................................................................. 6-33
GP 18 Machine Lubrication............................................................................................. 6-34
GP 20 to GP 25
GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications .................................................................. 6-35
GP 21 Installation Space Requirements ......................................................................... 6-48
GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements............................................................................ 6-51
GP 23 Environmental Data ............................................................................................. 6-53
GP 24 Memory Resources.............................................................................................. 6-53
GP 25 First Copy / Print Out Time and Power On / Off Time.......................................... 6-54
Diagnostic Codes dC001 to dC131b
dC001 Reset Auditron Master PIN.................................................................................. 6-55
dC104 Modal Usage Counters........................................................................................ 6-55
dC109 Embedded Fax Protocol Report .......................................................................... 6-56
dC111 Tag Matrix............................................................................................................ 6-58
dC131 NVM Read/Write.................................................................................................. 6-58
dC131a NVM Tables Chain 1 to 10 ................................................................................ 6-59
dC131b NVM Tables Chain 12 to 28 .............................................................................. 6-71
Diagnostic Codes dC131c
dC131c Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (1 of 5) ................................................... 6-87
Diagnostic Codes dC131d
dC131d Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (2 of 5) ................................................... 6-101
Diagnostic Codes dC131e
dC131e Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (3 of 5) ................................................... 6-115
Diagnostic Codes dC131f
dC131f Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (4 of 5) .................................................... 6-129
Diagnostic Codes dC131g to dC132
dC131g Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (5 of 5) ................................................... 6-143
dC132 NVM Initialisation................................................................................................. 6-156
Diagnostic Codes dC305 to dC905
dC305 UI Test ................................................................................................................. 6-159
dC312 Network Echo Tests............................................................................................. 6-159
dC314 Network Connectivity Tests ................................................................................. 6-160
dC330 Component Control.............................................................................................. 6-161
dC502 DADH Width Guide Calibration Procedure.......................................................... 6-173
dC604 Registration Setup Procedure.............................................................................. 6-174
dC606 Internal Print Test Patterns.................................................................................. 6-177
dC640 Video Path Diagnostics........................................................................................ 6-177
dC905 TC Sensor Calibration ......................................................................................... 6-178
GP 40
GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................ 6-179
Change Tags
Tags ................................................................................................................................ 6-187
Processor Tags ............................................................................................................... 6-188
DADH Tags ..................................................................................................................... 6-188
Finisher (2K LCSS) Tags ................................................................................................ 6-189
Finisher (1K LCSS) Tags ................................................................................................ 6-190
Finisher (HCSS) Tags ..................................................................................................... 6-191
Finisher (HCSSBM) Tags................................................................................................ 6-191
Network Controller Tags.................................................................................................. 6-192
Fax Tags ......................................................................................................................... 6-192
July 2005
July 2005
6-3 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) GP 1
GP 1 to GP 9
GP 1 Diagnostics Entry, Facilities and Exit
Purpose
This procedure describes the items that follow:
How to Enter Diagnostics.
Diagnostic Menu.
How to Exit From Diagnostics.
How to Enter the Service Copy Mode.
NOTE: When the diagnostic mode is entered, all existing copy jobs are cancelled. If a network
controller is installed, then the screen message indicates Offline. When the exit from diagnos-
tics is performed, the screen message indicates Online.
Procedure
How to Enter Diagnostics
NOTE: If a foreign interface is installed, diagnostics entry from the features screen is allowed
when the user number is known. If the user number is not known, select the job status or
machine status screen to enter diagnostics.
1. Switch on the machine, GP 14.
2. When the machine is in the ready state, press and hold the # key, then press the Access
key.
3. Enter the password (default is 1934). Touch the Enter button on the UI.
NOTE: Press the C Key to clear an incorrect entry. Three incorrect entries cause the entry
screen to lock for three minutes.
4. Select the correct tab from the Diagnostic screen, refer to Table 1.
Diagnostic Menu
The Diagnostic Routines screen gives access to the diagnostic menu, refer to Table 1. The
diagnostic routines available are given below:
Copier routines:
dC131 NVM Read/Write
dC132 NVM Initialisation - Copier.
dC305 UI Test.
dC330 Component Control.
dC502 DADH Width Calibration.
dC604 Registration Setup.
dC640 Video Path Diagnostics.
dC905 TC Sensor Calibration.
Network routines:
dC109 Embedded Fax Protocol Report.
dC132 NVM Initialisation - Network
dC312 Network Echo Test.
dC314 Network Connectivity Tests.
Other routines:
dC001 Reset Auditron Master Pin.
dC104 Modal Usage Counters.
dC111 Tag Matrix.
dC606 Internal Print Test Patterns.
How to Exit From Diagnostics
1. Touch the Exit button to exit from the dC procedures.
2. Touch the Call Closeout button to exit diagnostics.
3. When the Call Closeout window is displayed, the options that follow are available:
Reset All Counters. The default is No. If the Yes button is touched, the counters that
follow are reset:
Faults.
Last 40 faults.
Total Images made after the last service call.
Reboot copier. The default is Yes. Image processor, IOT, scanner, GUI, DADH, tray
1 and 2 assembly, HCF and Finisher are rebooted. Touch the No button if the
machine reboot is not needed.
NOTE: If the machine is not rebooted, the exit time from diagnostics is decreased.
Reboot Network Controller. The default is No. If the Yes button is touched, the net-
work controller is reset.
4. Touch the Closeout button to complete the exit procedure.
How to Enter the Service Copy Mode
The Service Copy Mode allows customer copy screens for copy jobs when the items that fol-
low are enabled:
Auditron.
Foreign interface.
Job based accounting.
When the machine is in the Service Copy Mode, the statements that follow are true:
For the configurations with a network controller, the screen message Offline appears.
The customers online or offline state is stored in NVM and restored when the system exits
the Service Copy Mode.
1. Press and hold the # button, then press the Access button.
2. Enter the password for the Service Copy Mode, (default is 4391). Touch the Enter button
on the UI.
3. Make the copy jobs that use the customer copy screens.
NOTE: All counters operate normally.
While in the Service Copy Mode, there is no access to the Tools Pathway or Diagnostic
Mode.
NOTE: If the UI is not active for more than 60 seconds, the screen returns to the diagnos-
tics screen.
4. To return to the diagnostics screen, press and hold the # button, and then press the
Access button.
July 2005
Table 1 Diagnostic screen menu
1st Level 2nd Level 3rd Level 4th Level 5th Level
Service Info GP 3 Software Versions - - NOTE: Only the categories for the installed options are dis-
played.
- Billing Counters Display Current Billing Counters - -
- - Modify Displayed Billing Counters - -
- Machine Serial No.: - - -
- Images Since Last Call: - - -
- Network IP Address: Full Network IP Address value: - -
- System Administrator Passcode - - -
Fault History GP 2 Last 40 Faults - - -
- Fault Counters Fault Chain 01 Standby Power -
- - - 02 Mode Selection UI -
- - - 03 Machine Run Control -
- - - 04 Start Print Power -
- - - 05 Document Transport -
- - - 06 ROS -
- - - 07 Paper Supply -
- - - 08 Paper Feed and Transports -
- - - 09 Xerographic -
- - - 10 Copy Transports -
- - - 11 Sorter/Mailbox -
- - - 12 Finisher/DFA -
- - - 13 Transition Module -
- - - 14 RIS -
- - - 15 IPS1 -
- - - 16 Network Controller -
- - - 17 Disk Operation -
- - - 18 Connectivity -
- - - 19 Video Image Manipulation -
- - - 20 Fax -
- - - 21 RDT -
- - - 22 Main Controller Module -
dC Routines Copier Routines dC131 NVM Read/Write 01 Standby Power -
- - - 02 Mode Selection UI -
- - - 03 Machine Control -
- - NOTE: Refer to GP 4 Machine Software. 05 Document Transport -
- - - 06 ROS -
- - - 07 Paper Supply -
- - - 08 Paper Feed/Trans -
- - - 09 Xerographic -
- - - 10 Copy Trans/Fusing -
- - - 12 Finisher/DFA -
July 2005
- - - 13 Transition Module -
- - - 14 RIS -
- - - 15 Image Process Sys -
- - - 17 Disk Operation -
- - - 19 Video Image Manip -
- - - 20 Facsimile -
- - dC132 NVM Initialisation - Copier... All Copier NVM -
- - NOTE: Refer to GP 4 Machine Software. Machine Variable NVM -
- - - SA/KO Dust Off -
- - - System Counters Dust Off -
- - dC305 UI Test... User Interface Button Test -
- - - Audio Tone Test -
- - - LED Indicator Test -
- - - Touch Area Test -
- - - Display Pixel Test -
- - - Video Memory Test -
- - - Communications Self Test -
- - - Reset User Interface -
- - - Application Checksum Verification -
- - dC330 Component Control... - -
- - dC502 DADH Width Calibration... - -
- - dC604 Registration Setup... IOT Registration Side 1 -
- - - IOT Registration Side 2 -
- - - Scanner Registration -
- - - Document Handler Registration -
- - dC640 Video Path Diagnostics... EPC Memory test -
- - - Scanner Video Test -
- - - Network Controller/image process-
ing PWB Test
-
dC905 TC Sensor Calibration... - -
- Network Routines dC132 NVM Initialisation - Network All Network NVM -
- - - Variable NVM -
- - - Configuration NVM -
- - dC312 Echo Test TCP/IP Internal. - Tests internal IP stack and hosts file.
- - - - Network. - Tests the Network to find other IP hosts.
- - - Novell Internal. - Tests the internal Novell stack and driver.
- - - - Network. - Tests the Network to find the other IPX devices.
- - - NetBIOS/NetBEUI Network. - Tests the Network to find the other NetBIOS
devices.
- - - AppleTalk Network. - Tests the Network to find the other AppleTalk
devices.
July 2005
- - - Internal TCP/IP -
- - dC314 Network Connectivity Test... TCP/IP -
- - - Novell or IPX -
- - - NetBIOS/NetBEUI -
- - - AppleTalk -
- Other Routines dC001 Reset Auditron Master PIN - -
- - dC104 Modal Usage - -
- - dC111 Tag Matrix... - -
- - dC606 Print Test Patterns... - -
- Fax Routines dC109 Embedded Fax Protocol Report - -
- - dC131 NVM Read/Write - -
- - dC132 NVM Initialisation - -
- - dC330 Component Control - -
July 2005
GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files
Purpose
To explain the fault code structure and describe fault history contents.
Description
To access some history files from the UI, refer to Machine Status Button Fault History.
To view all the machine fault history, clear the last 40 faults, or reset each of the fault
counters, refer to Diagnostics Fault History.
NOTE: Network controller fault history logs are available via the PWS.
For information on fault codes, refer to Function, Fault, Component and Status Codes.
For information on status codes, refer to OF4 Status Codes and Messages RAP.
Procedure
1. Enter diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Select Fault History.
3. Select Last 40 Faults or Fault Counters button as appropriate and follow the on screen
instructions.
Function, Fault, Component and Status Codes
Refer to:
Table 1 Function and fault code prefixes. Also known as the chain code.
Table 2 Fault and control code suffixes. Also known as the link code.
Table 3 Finisher fault code and status code suffixes. Also known as the extension code.
For example. Displayed code 07-345 - Tray 1 Out of Service:
07 - The fault is located in the function chain Paper supply, Table 1.
345 - Because this starts with 3, it is a Controls code, Table 2. The 4 and the 5 are
sequence numbers and have no other significance.
NOTE: Where possible, the component related fault codes are the same as the component
control codes.
-
NOTE: The Finisher status code extensions are not normally visible.
Machine Status Button Fault History
The most recent fault and status codes can be displayed on the UI by pressing the Machine
Status button. Touch the Fault tab on the UI, then touch, as appropriate:
All Faults.
Active Messages - status codes and a status message.
Event Log.
Table 1 Function and fault code prefixes
Chain Code Function
01 Standby power
02 User interface mode selection
03 Machine run control
04 Start print power
05 Document transport
06 Raster output scanner (ROS)
07 Paper supply
08 Paper feed and transports
09 Xerographic
10 Fusing
11 Finisher
12 Offsetting catch tray
14 Raster input scanner (RIS)
15 Image Processing System (IPS1)
16 Network controller
19 Video image manipulation
20 Facsimile (FAX)
22 Main controller module
Table 2 Fault and control code suffixes
Link Code Description
000 to 099 Output
100 to 199 Jams
200 to 299 System timing
300 to 399 Controls
400 to 499 Spare or overflow
500 to 599 Status codes
600 to 699 Xerographic copy/print quality
700 to 799 Non-declared defects
800 to 899 Optional use
900 to 999 Operator messages
Table 3 Finisher fault code and status code extensions
Suffix No. Finisher Identifier
65 OCT
110 2K LCSS
120 1K LCSS
130 HCSS
170 HCSS BM
Table 1 Function and fault code prefixes
Chain Code Function
July 2005
Diagnostics Fault History
Description
The diagnostics Fault History window contains two options:
1. Last 40 faults - Displays the last 40 faults in time or code order. Displays a selected fault
in detail. Permits deletion of the entire history file.
2. Fault Counters - Displays the title buttons for the faults separated into chains. Selection of
a chain will display the fault detail.
NOTE: Categories that do not exist on the machine will not be displayed.
When a paper jams fault chain is selected and the OK button is touched, the details will be
shown for the selected chain. A Rate button is displayed. Touch the Rate button to show the
jam rate per million sheets fed (fault counter x 1 000 000 divided by sheets fed).
July 2005
GP 3 Service Information
Purpose
To provide machine hardware and software information.
Service Information From The Diagnostic Screen
Enter Diagnostics, GP 1, select the Service Information tab. This gives the following options:
Machine Serial Number. See Machine Serial Number
Images Since Last Call
Network IP Address
System Administration Passcode
Software Versions
System Set
SIP Bootcode
Software Upgrade
SIP Application
SIP IPP
Network Controller
GUI Bootcode
GUI Application
Document Handler Application
GUI VxWorks
GUI Software Upgrade
Output Device Application
Image Output Terminal Bootstrap
Image Output Terminal Bootloader
Image Output Terminal Application
Scanner Application
Tray 3 and 4
PFM
Billing Counters
Service Information From The UI Machine Information Tab
Press the machine information key to the right of the UI to display the machine information tab.
This gives the following options:
Machine Details
Customer Support
System Configuration
Supplies Number
Machine Serial Number. See Machine Serial Number
Current System Software Version
Machine Hardware Options Configuration
Paper Supply
Output Device
Pre-collation RAM
Image Disc
Fax
Foreign Interface Device
Network Controller
Network Controller RAM
USB Printer Port
Scanning Card
Machine Software Versions
Scanner and Image Processor
Image Output Terminal
User Interface
Network Controller
Document Handler
Fax
Output Device
Machine Serial Number
The machine serial number is also on the machine TAG label.
The serial number for the US markets is in the format XXX ###### #. Where XXX is the prod-
uct code (see Product Code). ###### is the serial number. # is the model code.
The serial number for the XE markets is in the format XXX ### ###### #. Where XXX is the
product code (see Product Code). ### is the manufacturing location code. ###### is the serial
number. # is the check digit.
Product Code
Primary Build
Primary build machines are supplied as CopyCentres. Configuration changes to faster speeds,
output modules, Workcentre and Workcentre Pro configurations are carried out as secondary
build upgrades.
URU: CopyCentre DC, 32 PPM, Platen, Stand, 198 to 264VAC.
URV: CopyCentre DC, 32 PPM, DADH, Stand, 198 to 264VAC.
URW: CopyCentre DC, 32 PPM, DADH, HCF, 198 to 264VAC.
URV: CopyCentre DC, 38 PPM, Platen. Stand, 198 to 264VAC.
UTC: CopyCentre DC, 38 PPM, DADH. Stand, 198 to 264VAC.
UTD: CopyCentre DC, 38 PPM, DADH, HCF, 198 to 264VAC.
UTE: CopyCentre DC, 45 PPM, Platen. Stand, 198 to 264VAC.
UTF: CopyCentre DC, 45 PPM, DADH, Stand, 198 to 264VAC.
UTG: CopyCentre DC, 45 PPM, DADH, HCF, 198 to 264VAC.
URK: CopyCentre DC, 55 PPM, DADH, HCF, 198 to 264VAC.
URM: CopyCentre DC, 65 PPM, DADH, HCF, 198 to 264VAC.
July 2005
URN: CopyCentre DC, 75 PPM, DADH, HCF, 198 to 264VAC.
URL: CopyCentre DC, 55 PPM, DADH, HCF, 102 to 140VAC, (For US government sites
in Europe).
URP: CopyCentre DC, 32 PPM, Platen, Stand, 102 to 140VAC.
URR: CopyCentre DC, 32 PPM, DADH, Stand, 102 to 140VAC.
URT: CopyCentre DC, 32 PPM, DADH, HCF, 102 to 140VAC.
UTV: CopyCentre DC, 55 PPM, DADH, Stand, 102 to 140VAC.
UTU: CopyCentre DC, 65 PPM, DADH, HCF, 102 to 140VAC.
Secondary Build Upgrades
UYN: 2K LCSS
ULV: 1K LCSS
PRY: HCSS
UTW: HCSS BM
WCG: Postscript
PWM: 256 DRAM
VYV: WorkCentre 32
VYW: WorkCentre Pro 32
WCD: CopyCentre 38
VYY: WorkCentre 38
WCC: WorkCentre Pro 38
WCE: CopyCentre 45
WCH: WorkCentre 45
WCK: WorkCentre Pro 45
WCM: WorkCentre 55
WCN: WorkCentre Pro 55
WCR: WorkCentre 65
WCT: WorkCentre Pro 65
WCU: CopyCentre 75
WCV: WorkCentre 75
WCW: WorkCentre Pro 75
VTN: FreeFlow Standard
VTP: FreeFlow Professional
WLK: FreeFlow Extra 5 Licence
WLL: FreeFlow Extra 15 Licence
WLM: FreeFlow Extra 50 Licence
July 2005
GP 4 Machine Software
Purpose
To provide machine software information and to show how to load software.
Description
Software sets are compilations of the various software modules and together with a SCD (soft-
ware compatibility database) are bundled into a DLM or UGD file available on a CD. There are
four methods of upgrading the machine software. Refer to Software Loading Procedure.
Refer to the items that follow for additional information about machine software:
Modules
Software Compatibility Database (SCD)
Common Upgrade Behaviour
Software Loading Procedure
Software Loading Progress
Modules
A software module is defined as a programmable piece of software existing as a file in its own
right. Software modules reside on hardware modules.
Hardware modules that contain firmware and cannot have software upgrades loaded are:
Scanner.
Paper feed module.
High capacity feeder.
NOTE: The software on the scanner, paper feed module or high capacity feeder can only
be upgraded by installing a newer version of the relevant PWB on each hardware module.
Software Compatibility Database (SCD)
The SCD is used to describe the machine system software. The SCD comprises of the system
software version, in the format W.XX.YYY.ZZZ and a list of software versions for the different
modules. It can be described as follows:
W - is the platform.
XX - is the field for major changes.
YYY - is the field for minor changes.
ZZZ - is for spar fixes.
NOTE: The system software version is displayed on the UI under Machine Details.
The primary function of an SCD is to ensure that all software on the machine is compatible.
When a machine without a network controller is switched on, the image processor compares
its SCD with the software in the hardware modules. If the software is not compatible, the image
processor requests a software upgrade. The software upgrade is done from the PWS. A soft-
ware upgrade may be requested if a new hardware module is installed.
When a network controller is fitted, the software in each hardware module is checked, at star-
tup, from the SCD on the network controller. If necessary, a software upgrade or downgrade is
instigated by the network controller.
NOTE: If a component is installed that has a later version of software than the software set on
the network controller, at machine startup the software on the new component will be down-
graded.
Common Upgrade Behaviour
Once an upgrade has been initiated the image processor will instruct all connected platforms to
go into software upgrade mode and will reboot itself into software upgrade mode.
Progress and errors are displayed on the GUI screen (and on the PWS software upgrade tool
screen if this is used). When the upgrade is complete the image processor will reboot the
whole machine.
The SCD is updated on successful completion of the upgrade.
Software Loading Procedure
Initial Requirements
Before software is loaded, ensure that the machine is in a fully operational condition. Any
active faults or jams must be resolved before starting this procedure.
NOTE: The procedure will take approximately 30 minutes.
If the software loading procedure fails, go to OF5 Boot Up Failure RAP.
Refer to the software loading options:
CopyCentre Software Loading
Software Loading Via the Customers Network
Software Loading From the PWS
Software Loading Using AltBoot
Procedure
CopyCentre
There is one method to load software onto the CopyCentre. The software is bundled in a UGD
file. Refer to CopyCentre Software Loading.
WorkCentre and WorkCentre Pro
There are three methods to load software onto the WorkCentre and WorkCentre Pro:
1. Use the customers network. The software is bundled in a DLM file. Refer to Software
Loading Via the Customers Network.
2. Use a PWS to download the software from a CD or the PWS hard disk drive to the
machine. The software is bundled in a DLM file. Refer to Software Loading From the
PWS.
3. Use a PWS to perform an alternate boot of the network controller. This procedure must
only be performed if the software on the network controller has become corrupt. Refer to
Software Loading Using AltBoot.
July 2005
CopyCentre Software Loading
Perform the following:
1. Use a USB cable, PL 26.10 Item 5 to connect the PWS to the USB port at the rear of the
image processing module, (32-55 ppm) PL 3.20 Item 1, (65-75 ppm) PL 3.10 Item 1.
2. Refer to the read me file supplied on the CD for the software loading procedure.
NOTE: The read me file is contained in the same folder as the software upgrade file.
3. The progress of the software loading procedure will be displayed on the UI. For more
information, refer to Software Loading Progress.
NOTE: The forced upgrade button on the PWS software upgrade tool must be selected
when reinstalling the same level of software.
Software Loading Via the Customers Network
The software is loaded via the customers network. As the software loading instructions are
subject to change, a read me file is available at the same location as the software. Refer to the
read me file for the software loading procedure.
The progress of the software loading procedure will be displayed on the UI. For more informa-
tion, refer to Software Loading Progress.
If the machine does not go into the software loading procedure, check the following:
The relevant cabling to the machine.
The functionality of the PC being used to perform the procedure.
Software Loading From the PWS
1. Print a copy of the latest configuration report.
2. Set the proxy server setting on the PWS. Perform the following:
a. Open Start / Control Panel/Network and Internet Connections / Network Connec-
tions/Local Area Connections.
b. Open Local Area Connection.
c. In the General tab, click on the properties button.
d. Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) icon.
e. Click on the Properties button.
f. Select Use the following IP address.
NOTE: Before changing the proxy server settings, record the original IP address and
Subnet mask. The original settings are reset at the end of this procedure.
g. Refer to the configuration report for IP address of the machine. Set the IP address of
the PWS one number higher than the machine. For example, if the IP address of the
machine is 192.168.196.112, set the IP address of the PWS to 192.168.196.113.
h. Refer to the configuration report for Subnet mask of the machine. Set the Subnet
mask of the PWS to the same as the Subnet mask of the machine.
NOTE: A default gateway setting is not required.
i. Click on OK to close the properties dialog box.
j. Click on OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.
k. If any settings have been changed, it will be necessary to reboot the PWS.
3. Switch on the machine, GP 14.
4. Disconnect the ethernet cable from the network controller.
5. Connect the ethernet crossover cable, PL 26.10 Item 6 between the network controller
and the PWS.
6. If the web browser on the PWS is set to use a proxy server, it will not connect to the
machines web page. Perform the following:
a. Open the web browser on the PWS.
b. Select Tools, then select Internet Options.
c. Select the Connections tab.
d. Click on the LAN settings button. The LAN settings dialog box will now be displayed.
e. The Use a proxy server for your LAN box should not be checked.
7. Open the web browser. Enter the machines IP address in the web browsers Address field,
then press the enter key. The machines web page will open.
NOTE: Refer to the configuration report for the machines IP address.
8. In the machines web page, click on the Properties tab.
9. Open the Services folder, then the Machine Software folder.
10. Select Manual Upgrade. The Administration dialog box will open.
11. Login as the administrator, i.e. Login: Admin. Password: 1111.
12. Click the browse button in the middle of the screen.
13. Browse to the correct location of the DLM file. If using the System Software CD, the dlm
file will be located at:\Inst\ #_##_##(software level) \ ST \ Upgrade. Select the dlm file,
then click open.
14. Click on the large green software installation button.
15. After a few minutes, the DLM appears in the machines print queue. The upgrade will
begin in approximately 10 minutes. The progress of the software loading procedure will
be played on the UI. For more information, refer to Software Loading Progress.
16. When the upgrade has completed, the machine will reboot automatically.
NOTE: When the machine reboots, the connection to the machines web page will be lost.
17. After the machine has rebooted, a configuration report will be printed. Check the software
version against the software version in the machine details screen on the user interface.
18. Compare the configuration reports. Ensure that the configuration report generated after
the upgrade shows the same machine configuration as before the upgrade.
19. If the proxy server setting on the PWS was changed, return the setting to the original
value.
July 2005
Software Loading Using AltBoot
CAUTION
The AltBoot procedure erases the customer Optional Services (Network Scanning; E-Mail;
Internet Fax; Network Accounting; Server Fax; Hard Disk Overwrite; Xerox Standard Account-
ing (XSA). Check with the customer, that they have the necessary codes to enable their
Optional Services and they can restore any configuration information for the installed options.
NOTE: After this procedure, the machines NVM values will be reset to default. If necessary,
perform a NVM Save and Restore. Refer to GP 5 Portable Work Station and Tools.
To restore the XSA data, use the customers XSA data backup (clone) file on the customers
PC. Refer to the Customer Administrators Guide CD.
PWS Configuration
NOTE: This procedure will vary, dependent on which version of Windows is being used.
NOTE: It may be necessary to record the current network settings if they are being used by
another application.
1. If possible, print a copy of the latest configuration report.
2. Set the proxy server setting on the PWS. Perform the following:
a. Open Start / Control Panel / Network and Internet Connections / Network Connec-
tions / Local Area Connections.
b. Open Local Area Connection.
c. In the General tab, click on the properties button.
d. Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) icon.
e. Click on the Properties button.
f. Select Use the following IP address.
NOTE: Before changing the proxy server settings, record the original IP address and
Subnet mask. The original settings must be reset at the end of this procedure.
g. Refer to the configuration report for IP address of the machine. Set the IP address of
the PWS one number higher than the machine. For example, if the IP address of the
machine is 192.168.196.112, set the IP address of the PWS to 192.168.196.113.
h. Refer to the configuration report for Subnet mask of the machine. Set the Subnet
mask of the PWS to the same as the Subnet mask of the machine.
NOTE: A default gateway setting is not required.
i. Click on OK to close the properties dialog box.
j. Click on OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.
k. If any settings have been changed, it will be necessary to reboot the PWS.
AltBoot Hardware and Software
Hardware requirements:
PWS, minimum level 8.1.
Serial cable, PL 26.10 Item 12
9 way gender changer, PL 26.10 Item 1.
Ethernet crossover cable, PL 26.10 Item 6
Correct machine PWS Diagnostic Tools.
Software requirements:
Linux.netboot - Linux Kernal File.
kfs*.gz - Linux Root File System File.
*.dim - Image File.
These files are found on the System Software CD.
AltBoot Procedure
If the BIOS needs updating it will also be necessary to have the following file:
Iroot_os-bup.gz_BIOS Upgrade File
Before connecting any of the cables it is important to ensure the laptop has IP address
assigned to it. This is only an issue if the laptop has never been connected to a network before.
If is has not you should look under Control Panel -> Network and dialup Settings -> local Area
Connection -> Properties -> Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) Your Control Panel -> Network -> TCP
/ IP Your network Card depending on which operating system you are using. If not specified
then you should enter an IP Address such as 192.168.0.2.
NOTE: If using an older operating system you may be asked to reboot at this stage.
If you use DHCP and have connected to a network previously there will be no need to change
the current setting.
It is important to perform the following steps prior to attempting an Ailrtboot:
1. Ensure that the network controller is powered down.
2. Remove the network controller ethernet cable so it is not connected to the local network.
3. Connect the special crossover ethernet cable from the laptop network port to the network
controller network port.
4. Connect the null modem serial cable from the laptop serial port to the network controller
serial port.
5. Start the AlternateBoot Application.
6. Power on the network controller.
July 2005
AltBoot Process - Stage 1
After a few seconds a message similar to the following will appear:
===============================
ALTERNATE BOOT Ver 4.0
===============================
System ID => Xerox Denali v1.00
BIOS ID => American Megatreats Inc. 0701 03/04/2004
Board ID => Celestica Denali P 2 CMY123432000378
uP ID => AMD mobile and Duron (tm) 00800 MHz
Main Revision => 4.1.0
===============================
Press any key for the AltBoot menu (05)
You have five seconds to press a key in the AltBoot Terminal Window in order to interrupt the
normal boot process. It is necessary to do this in order to let the network controller know that
we wish to perform an AltBoot.
When interrupted the following menu appears in the terminal window:
===============================
===============================
===============================
MAIN MENU
===============================
1. Continue Boot-Up
2. PWS Boot
3. Diagnostic Menu
4. Reboot System
===============================
Selection:(1) = >
Select the option:
Option 1, will perform a normal boot from the network controller hard disk.
Option 2, is used to perform the AltBoot process. Move onto AltBoot -Stage 2
Option 3, will allow you to run simple diagnostics see AltBoot Process - Diagnostic Menu.
Option 4, is used to reboot the network controller if you decide not to AltBoot.
Press key 2 and continue to Stage 2.
The following menu will be displayed in the AltBoot terminal window:
===============================
===============================
===============================
PWS BOOT MENU
===============================
1. Return to Main Menu
2. Download Linux Netboot Image
===============================
Selection:(1) = >
Sect the option:
Option 1, will return you to the Main Menu AltBoot Process - Stage 1
Option 2, continues with the AltBoot process.
Press key 2 within 30 seconds to continue.
You should now see Download Request appear in the status bar at the bottom left. A file open
window will then appear.
You should enter the Filename box or use the browse button to select the Linux Kernel file.
Select Open button. The transfer progress dialog will be displayed.
The Progress Bar will display how far it is through the transfer.
You can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the Cancel button. If the download fails or
you press Cancel button you will need to choose Options -> Reset Terminal and start again
from the AltBoot Hardware and Software.
If the transfer completes successfully the Transfer dialog will close automatically and another
File Open window appears.
You must enter in the Filename box or use the Browse button to select the Linux Root File
System File.
July 2005
Select the Open button. The Transfer Progress dialog will be displayed, text scrolls on the Alt-
Boot screen.
The Progress Bar displays how far it is through the transfer.
You can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the Cancel button. If the down load fails
press the Cancel button you will need to choose Options -> Reset Terminal and start again
from the AltBoot Hardware and Software.
If the transfer completes successfully the transfer progress dialog will shut automatically. To
continue with the AltBoot process see AltBoot Process - Stage 3.
The Browse for Folder window will appear
This window is to allow you to choose the directory for the Disk Image (*.dlm) file. Unlike previ-
ous versions of the AltBoot, for this version the exact directory the file resides in, should be
chosen.
Scroll to the folder (for example Ess) and double click on the folder and leave open.
Select OK
Once that is done there will be some initial start up steps (such as uncompromising utilities)
before the next menus appear in the Terminal Window.
Received packet from 192.168.1.50.
Bringing up loopback interface
Hostname: XRX_ 00E0EC129472
IP Address: 192.168.1.51
Netmask: 255.255.252.0
Broadcast: 13.210.240.27
Are these correct (y / n)?
NOTE: Make sure that the Received packet line appeared and that the IP address of the Net-
work Controller is set one digit out from the address that the packet was received from. You
should just be able to press y at the prompt and continue, but if the valid netmask is not set
you may need press n and change it to something such as the value above.
Entering y will take you to AltBoot Process - Stage 4
Entering n will abort the AltBoot Process
Press y button and then press the Enter button.
If an error occurs you will be required to return to the start of the procedure.
The following menu will appear in the terminal window:
Alternate Boot - compatible from E4.0 onward
Select from the list the action you wish to perform:
1. Repair (Recreate) ESS Disk Partitions
2. Display ESS Disk Partition Information
3. Verify ESS Software
4. Reset ESS configuration to defaults
5. Install ESS software
6. Install UK Release
7. Boot ESS disk
8. Quit to shell
Press the 5 key and press the Enter key to continue with the AltBoot Process
With option 5 selected the following will appear:
**********************************************************************************************************
This procedure will repartition the disk and install software. If you are downloading, there is a
chance that some or ALL of the systems configuration setting will be lost. Printing a configura-
tion report is strongly recommended before proceeding.
***********************************************************************************************************
Proceed? (y / n)
Press the y key and press the Enter key and continue to AltBoot Process - Stage 5.
The following menu is displayed in the terminal window.
FTP Server IP Address: 192.168.1.50
FTP Server Path:./upgrade
FTP Login: anonymous
1) Set FTP Server IP Address 3) Set FTP Login
2) Set FTP Server Path 4) Continue
Select the option:
Option 1, will allow you to enter a different IP address to try and connect to. If detected
correctly last time then this address will not need changing.
Option 2, allows you to specify a different path for the file transfer. You need to choose
this option and set the path to be ./ .
Option 3, allows the user name and password used for the file transfer to be changed.
This setting does not need to be altered for this version of AltBoot.
Option 4, will continue with the AltBoot process.
Press the key 4 and press the Enter key to continue.
The following will then be displayed in the Terminal Window.
Select from the list the file you wish to download:
July 2005
10 ecnB1920020.2.dlm
Select the option number for the update file.dlm
It is possible that there may be more that one file in this list. Ensure that the correct image file
is selected.
If no files are returned then the wrong directory has been setup and you will be required to
close the application and restart the process from cable connections.
When the file is selected the partitions will be created.
When this has happened the Disk Image transfer will take place. A windows progress dialog
will be displayed on the screen while the transfer is occurring. If the transfer fails for any reason
it should be possible to press the Cancel button on the progress dialog to abandon it.
The file will now be unpacked and installed. This will take several minutes but it is VERY impor-
tant that the Network Controller is NOT powered down during this stage. Once the files are
installed the following messages will appear:
Dismounting ESS disk
*****************************************************************************************************
The machine will now be rebooted
***********************************************************************************************************
Press the y key and then press the Enter key to proceed.
You should now wait while the network controller reboots. Rebooting will take several minutes
and at certain points there will be no indication that the network controller will reboot again dur-
ing the middle of the process. It should eventually startup and display the following message
indicating that it is now working properly.
***********************************************************************************************************
**************************ESS System is OPERATIONAL************************************
***********************************************************************************************************
AltBoot Process - Diagnostic Menu
When Display Diagnostics Menu is chosen the following menu will appear:
===============================
===============================
===============================
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
===============================
1. Test Memory
2. Display POST Results
3. Exit Diagnostic Menu
4. Reboot System
===============================
Selection:(1) = >
Select the options:
Option1, will perform a memory test, display any errors and then return to this menu.
Option 2, will display the results of the Power On Self Test and then reboot the system.
Options 3, will return you to the Main Menu in AltBoot Process - Stage 1
Select the required option.
July 2005
During the software loading procedure, a bar chart will be displayed on the UI. The bar chart
indicates the progress of the procedure. Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the start and progress of a
software upgrade. The screen has the following features:
Each of the seven hardware modules has three progress bars assigned. The three
progress bars are erase (top), write (middle), verify (bottom).
Each of the three progress bars must reach 100% for each hardware module being
upgraded before an upgrade is successful. The box to the left of the three progress bars
indicate the four conditions during upgrading.
White no upgrade is necessary.
Flashing black, an upgrade is in progress
Solid black, an upgrade has completed
Solid grey a module has failed to be upgraded.
When all the boxes are solid black or solid white and the progress bars are 100%, an
upgrade has been completed.
If a box shows as grey, repeat the upgrade. As part of a successful upgrade the machine
will reboot. The machine will reboot once more to restore settings. After this second
reboot the machine will function as normal.
Figure 1 Start of upgrade
Figure 2 Software upgrade in progress
July 2005
GP 5 Portable Work Station and Tools
Purpose
To describe the PWS diagnostic tools.
Description
The PWS Diagnostic Tools are:
Alternate Boot Tool.
Counter Retrieval.
Network Configuration.
Network Controller Logging.
NVM Save and Restore.
Software Upgrade.
Alternate Boot Tool
CAUTION
The AltBoot procedure erases the customer Optional Services (Network Scanning; E-Mail;
Internet Fax; Network Accounting; Server Fax; Hard Disk Overwrite; Xerox Standard Account-
ing (XSA). Check with the customer, that they have the necessary codes to enable their
Optional Services and they can restore any configuration information for the installed options.
The Alternate Boot Tool (AltBoot) is a tool to download the software to the network controller
when the software on the network controller has become corrupt. Refer to GP 4 Software
Loading Using AltBoot.
A diagnostic menu is available in the AltBoot tool. Access to the diagnostic menu is during the
AltBoot Process - Stage 1 and select the Diagnostics Menu from the Main Menu.
There are three selections on the AltBoot diagnostic menu:
1. Test Memory.
2. Display POST Results.
3. Exit Diagnostic Menu.
Select the option number to start the test or to exit from the AltBoot diagnostic menu.
NOTE: Do not perform the tests available in the AltBoot diagnostic menu unless instructed to
by the service manual.
Counter Retrieval
Use this tool to save the billing counters information to file. The file includes details of regis-
tered fault codes, plus a list of the last 40 fault codes.
Network Configuration
Network Configuration is used to manage network systems. This tool displays the state of the
network settings
Network Controller Logging
Network Controller Logging is used to enable or disable network controller logging and also
retrieve log files for off line viewing. The logging files that follow are stored on the network con-
troller and can be accessed, and with one exception displayed on the PWS:
Network controller Process / State Logs - a record of state changes.
Network controller Debug Logs / Core Files - a compressed file containing all the log files,
cannot be displayed on PWS. It is saved on the PWS as a *.log file for analysis.
Event Log - a record of unscheduled events.
Shutdown Log - a record of faults serious enough for the network controller to stop work-
ing (if the fault does not shut down the network controller before the error can be logged).
Error / Warning Log - a record of anomalies that are not serious enough to cause the sys-
tem to reset.
Completed Job Log - a record of the completed jobs.
There is a Status and Results window, and log files can be saved to a *.log text file on the
PWS.
Enable/Disable Log Files
The network controller process/state log files are permanently enabled. The logs that follow
can be enabled or disabled as a group using the PWS:
CAUTION
Enabling these logs will degrade machine performance.
NC Debug Logs.
Event Log.
Shutdown Log.
Error / Warning Log.
Completed Job Log.
NOTE: It is not necessary to keep the PWS connected while selectable logging is
enabled.
NVM Save and Restore
NVM Save and Restore is used to save NVM settings to a disk (this would normally be the
machine resident diskette) and then restore them to the machine. Previous NVM values can be
restored after loading a software set using AltBoot, or if the machines NVM settings are
changed.
CAUTION
When the machine software is upgraded using AltBoot, customer NVM settings are not auto-
matically saved. The customer NVM settings must be saved, then restored using NVM Save
and Restore.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the PWS is connected to a mains AC power supply.
2. Open the NVM Save and Restore application on the PWS. Follow the instructions.
If the PWS suffers a power failure or crash during the procedure, the machine should recover.
If the machine has not recovered after 5 minutes, perform the following:
1. Switch on the PWS. Open the NVM Save and Restore application on the PWS.
2. Select the Exit button in the NVM Save and Restore window.
July 2005
3. Restart the NVM Save and Restore procedure.
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade is used to upgrade the machine software. When in software upgrade mode
the machine will:
Go offline.
Disable power saver mode.
Not respond to activation of the on / off switch.
Disable all job features.
On completion of the upgrade the machine will exit the software upgrade mode and reboot.
Refer to GP 4 Machine Software.
July 2005
GP 6 Screw Usage
Purpose
To prevent damage to parts that are easily damaged by screws not being installed correctly.
Procedure
Replacing Existing Screws
Always use the correct driver for the type of screw head. Use a nut driver where possible
because this gives a better grip on a screw than a slotted or cross-head driver.
Take care not to install self-tapping screws into machine-screw holes, or machine-screws into
self-tapper holes.
When replacing self-tapping screws into plastic components, turn the screw counterclockwise
to engage the original thread, then turn the screw clockwise. Do not overtighten. If a new
thread is cut, the plastic component will lose the ability to hold the screw as firmly, and eventu-
ally not at all. This also applies, to a lesser degree, to metal components.
NOTE: Reverse the direction of turn for left-hand threads.
The same method can be usefully applied to machine thread screws and nuts to avoid cross
threading.
Inserting a Screw into an Unthreaded Hole
Some new components are supplied with fastening holes that do not have the screw thread
pre-cut. It is the insertion of the first screw into the hole that forms the thread.
CAUTION
Use the following procedure to avoid broken screws and damaged holes:
1. Ensure that the screw is a thread forming screw, refer to Figure 1.
Figure 1 Thread forming screw
If the screw that is used to fasten the component does not appear to be a thread forming
screw, temporarily use a thread forming screw from another location on the machine.
2. Do not assemble the new part into the machine yet, form the screw threads first.
3. Use the correct screw driver or nut driver to ensure a good grip on the head of the screw.
4. Using a moderate axial force, insert the screw to form the thread in the hole, then remove
the screw.
5. Repeat step 4 as necessary until all fastening holes in the new component are threaded
6. Assemble the component on the machine.
Three or four lobes on the end
of the thread
Tapered end to thread
Majority of thread is parallel
July 2005
GP 7 Miscellaneous Checks
Purpose
To indicate which types of problems to look for when checking or inspecting parts of the
machine.
Procedure
1. Assess the fault. Is the part broken, too loose, too tight. Check if it needs cleaning or lubri-
cating.
2. Check the items under the appropriate heading that follows:
Actuators
Free movement.
Damage
Contamination.
Bearings
Wear.
Damage.
Contamination.
Drive Belts
Wear.
Damaged teeth.
Correct tension.
Contamination of tension rollers and support shafts.
Gears
Contamination.
Chips or cracks.
Wear.
Misalignment.
Gravity Fingers and Stripper Fingers
Free movement.
Missing fingers.
Damage.
Contamination on the fingers, rollers or on the pivot shaft.
Harnesses and Wiring
Continuity.
Short-circuits caused by physical damage or contamination of conductors, terminals or
connectors.
Overheated insulation.
Damaged insulation near moving parts and sharp edges.
Pin and receptacle damage on connectors.
Rollers
Flats.
Tears.
Contamination.
Secure E-clips and other retainers.
Shafts
Contamination.
Misalignment.
Rotates without binding.
July 2005
GP 8 Special Tools and Consumables
Description
Refer to the following:
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when using solvents and cleaning agents, PL 26.10 Item 10.
Antistatic fluid, PL 26.10 Item 19.
Cleaning agent.
Disposable gloves, PL 26.10 Item 10.
General protection.
Ethernet crossover cable, PL 26.10 Item 6.
PWS to network controller.
Film remover, PL 26.10 Item 4.
Cleaning agent.
Finisher bypass harness, PL 26.10 Item 7.
Electrical cheat for PJ151.
Formula A cleaning fluid, PL 26.10 Item 2.
General cleaning.
Lens and mirror cleaner, PL 26.10 Item 9.
Optics cleaning.
Micro fiber wiper, PL 26.10 Item 13.
General cleaning.
9 way gender changer/null modem adapter PL 26.10 Item 1.
Plastislip grease, PL 26.10 Item 8.
Lubrication for plastic gears and components.
Serial cable, PL 26.10 Item 12.
Staple cartridge, PL 26.10 Item 11.
Test pattern, A3/11X17, PL 26.10 Item 14.
IQS 1 Solid Area Density and IQS 2 Background.
Test pattern, A4, PL 26.10 Item 15.
Test pattern, 8.5 X 11, PL 26.10 Item 16.
Test pattern, solid area density scale, PL 26.10 Item 17.
IQS 1 Solid Area density.
Test pattern, visual scale, PL 26.10 Item 18.
IQS 2 Background.
USB cable, PL 26.10 Item 5.
PWS (portable work station) to image processing PWB.
July 2005
GP 9 IOT PWB Spare Parts Strategy
Purpose
To describe the spare parts strategy for the IOT PWB.
General
At manufacture the 32-38 ppm machine will be built with a IOT PWB which is unique to this
speed of machine. Refer to Figure 1.
The spare parts strategy is to only have one universal IOT PWB, to be used across the com-
plete speed range of the machines. Refer to Figure 2.
The difference is that the spared universal IOT PWB will have PJ64 which is for the scorotron
auto cleaning and is used on 45-75 ppm machines only. It will also have PJ33 which is for the
cooling fans in the front door of the 65-75 ppm machines only. These two PJs are not used on
the 32-38 ppm machines.
Figure 1 IOT PWB on 32-38 ppm machines
Figure 2 Universal IOT PWB
July 2005
July 2005
GP 10 How to Check a Motor
This procedure describes how to check the motors that follow:
Two Wire DC Motors.
Four Wire Stepper Motor
Six Wire Stepper Motor.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14. Disconnect the power lead from the
customer supply while tasks are performed that do not need the electricity. The electric-
ity can cause the death or injury of persons. The moving components can cause the
injury of persons.
1. Check that the motor is free to rotate.
2. Check that all the motors mechanisms are clean, free to move and lubricated correctly.
3. Enter the component control code for the motor, refer to dC330. If the motor does not run
correctly, perform the correct procedure that follows:
Two Wire DC Motors.
Four Wire Stepper Motor.
Six Wire Stepper Motor.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example
only. Go to the circuit diagram in the RAP for the correct information.
NOTE: For the motors supplied through the IOT PWB, refer to the OF7 IOT Diagnostics
RAP.
Two Wire DC Motors
Go to Flag 2. Disconnect PJB. Check that +24V is measured when the component control
code for the motor is entered.
Go to Flag 1. Disconnect PJA. Check for +24V on the LVPS.
Go to Flag 3. Disconnect PJC. Check that the signal changes on the IOT PWB when the
component control code for the motor is entered.
Check the wiring and the connectors for the motor circuit.
References:
01G +24V Distribution RAP.
01B 0V Distribution RAP.
REP 1.2 Wiring Harness Repairs.
Four Wire Stepper Motor
Go to Flag 6. Disconnect PJH. Check the motor on pulses on the harness when the com-
ponent control code for the motor is entered.
Go to Flag 6. Disconnect PJJ. Check the motor on pulses on the harness when the com-
ponent control code for the motor is entered.
References:
Six Wire Stepper Motor
Go to Flag 5. Disconnect PJF. Check the +24V supply and the motor on pulses when the
component control code for the motor is entered.
Go to Flag 4. Disconnect PJD. Check the +24V, +5V and 0V supplies.
Go to Flag 4. Check the clock pulses.
Go to Flag 4. Check that the signal on PJD pin 13 changes when the component control
code for the motor is entered.
References:
01E +5V distribution RAP.
July 2005
Figure 1 Circuit diagram
July 2005
GP 11 How to Check a Sensor
Description
Use this procedure to check the operation of all types of sensor.
NOTE: The circuit diagram, Figure 1 shows a flag sensor. Some sensors have a resistor within
the sensor, other sensors require a resistor is on the PWB. The resistor decreases the voltage
to the sensor LED.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Go to the circuit diagram in the RAP for the correct information.
Initial Actions
WARNING
injury of persons.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Make sure that the sensor is installed correctly.
2. Clean the sensor and the area around the sensor.
3. If a flag actuator is installed, check that it has free movement.
4. Check that the paper path is clear.
5. If the sensor activates by a surface that reflects, check that the surface is clean. Also
make sure that there is not an obstruction between the sensor and the surface.
Quick Sensor Check
Enter the component control code for the sensor, refer to dC330. Activate the sensor. If the dis-
play changes, the sensor operates correctly. If the display does not change, perform the proce-
dure.
Procedure
Go to Flag 1. Disconnect PJA. Check for +3.3V and 0V at PJA on the harness.
Go to Flag 2. Disconnect PJC. Check the wiring and the connectors for the sensor circuit.
Go to Flag 2. Check for +3.3V and 0V at PJC on the IOT PWB.
If necessary, install new components or repair the wiring.
References:
01D +3.3V Distribution RAP.
July 2005
GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch
Description
Use this procedure to check a clutch or solenoid.
Initial Actions
WARNING
injury of persons.
1. For a clutch, check that the mechanical components are clean, free to move and lubri-
cated correctly
2. For a solenoid, check that the armature is free to move and the mechanical components
are free to move.
Procedure
NOTE: When a solenoid is energized in diagnostics, armature movement is seen. When a
clutch is energized in diagnostics, the sound of the clutch action is heard. If possible, energize
the motor connected to the clutch to see when the clutch is energized.
Go to Flag 1. Check that the signal changes on the IOT PWB when the component con-
trol code for the clutch or solenoid is entered.
Go to Flag 2. Disconnect PJC. Check that +24V is measured when the component control
code for the clutch or solenoid is entered.
Go to Flag 3. Disconnect PJD. Check for +24V on the LVPS.
Check the wiring and the connectors for the clutch or solenoid circuit.
References:
July 2005
GP 13 How to Check a Switch
Description
Use this procedure to check the operation of a switch.
NOTE: The circuit in Figure 1 shows an interlock switch activated by the closing of a door.
Initial Actions
WARNING
injury of persons.
Manually check that the switch operates, for example, the magnet or other actuator has
enough mechanical movement to operate the switch.
Procedure
Go to Flag 1. Disconnect PJA. Check the electrical operation of the switch.
Go to Flag 1. Disconnect PJB. Check for +5V and 0V on the IOT PWB.
Go to Flag 1. Check the wiring and the connectors for the switch circuit.
References:
01E +5V Distribution RAP.
July 2005
GP 14 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the
Machine
Purpose
To show how to switch off or switch on the machine, without the loss of customer data or dam-
age to the system hardware.
WARNING
injury of persons.
WARNING
Do not use the on/off switch as a safety disconnect device. The on/off switch is not a
disconnect device. Disconnect the power cord from the supply to isolate the equipment.
Refer to:
Switch Off Procedure.
Switch Off Failure Procedure.
Quick Restart
Switch On Procedure.
Power Saver Mode
Switch Off Procedure
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the power lead or interrupt the electricity supply before the power down is
complete unless advised. The data and software can become damaged.
1. Press the on/off switch. The Power Down Options window will display.
NOTE: The Power Down Confirmation window replaces the Power Down Options window
when the operations that follow are performed:
a. The machine is in the diagnostics mode.
b. During CRU replacement.
c. The machine is in the Install Wizard or Setup Modes.
d. A module is not communicating.
e. The Power Saver mode is disabled.
f. A software upgrade is performed.
g. The network controller initializes.
2. Touch the Power Down button on the UI.
3. When the Power Off Confirmation window appears, touch the Confirm button.
NOTE: If a controlled power off is confirmed, the on / off switch is disabled until the
sequence is completed.
If there is a fault that prevents power down, the UI requests that the power lead is
removed and replaced after one minute.
4. When the machine has switched off, remove the power lead from the outlet.
5. If the machine does not switch off, go to Switch Off Failure Procedure.
General
1. When power down is selected and confirmed, power down starts after a maximum of 45
seconds with the exceptions that follow:
a. If the system and the UI cannot communicate, then power down begins after 3 sec-
onds.
b. If possible, the system finishes all jobs.
c. The delays occur if the machine cancels:
i. A print job or copy job.
ii. An exposure lamp calibration.
iii. An image quality adjustment.
iv. Diagnostic mode communications.
d. If a module does not respond and the power down is possible, the power down com-
pletes after a maximum of 2 minutes.
2. The machine stops processing all jobs that remain in the queue.
3. A warning message displays on the UI.
Switch Off Failure Procedure
CAUTION
Do not move or remove the network controller if the power lead was disconnected to power
down the machine. A controlled power down puts the hard disk drive of the network controller
in a safe position.
1. If the machine fails to power down, disconnect the power lead.
2. If necessary, reconnect the power lead after one minute.
3. If the machine does not power down again, perform the 03-374 Power Off Failure RAP.
Quick Restart
The quick restart causes the system to reset the software of the image processing PWB, the
IOT PWB and the GUI.
1. Press the on/off switch. The Power Down Options window will display.
NOTE: The Power Down Confirmation window replaces the Power Down Options window
when the operations that follow are performed:
a. The machine is in the diagnostics mode.
b. During CRU replacement.
c. The machine is in the Install Wizard or Setup Modes.
d. A module is not communicating.
e. The Power Saver mode is disabled.
f. A software upgrade is performed.
g. The network controller initializes.
2. Touch the Quick Restart button on the UI.
3. When the Quick Restart Confirmation window appears, touch the Confirm button.
4. The Quick Restart window now appears with the message that follows: Quick Restart is
underway and will take approximately 1 minute.
Switch On Procedure
1. After a machine has been switched off, wait a minimum of one minute before the machine
is switched on.
July 2005
6-31 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) GP 14, GP 15
2. After a service call, ensure that all service tools are removed from the machine.
3. Connect the power lead from the power supply outlet to the machine.
4. Press the on/off switch.
5. If the machine does not initialize, go to the correct RAP as follows:
If the machine switches on, but the UI is blank, go to the OF2 UI Touch Screen Fail-
ure RAP.
If the machine does not respond, go to the OF3 Dead Machine RAP.
If the machine switches on, but does not respond, go to the OF5 Boot Up Failure
RAP.
NOTE: When a machine with a network controller initializes, the image processor com-
pares the software versions in the machine and the network controller. If there is a differ-
ence, the network controller software overwrites the software in the machine. Refer to GP
4 Machine Software.
General
1. When the power lead is connected, the LVPS +3.3VSB supply is energized. The LVPS
+3.3VSB supply provides +3.3VSB to the on/off switch and the IOT PWB.
2. When the on/off switch is pressed, the LVPS is energized. The +3.3V, +5V, +12V, +24V
and AC voltage for the auxiliary output sockets and fuser module is distributed.
3. Each module manages its power-on self-test (POST) and power-up sequence.
NOTE: Refer to GP 22 Electrical Power requirements for further information.
Power Saver Mode
The Power Saver mode is selected from the Power Down window. The Power Saver mode is
delayed until the machine is not active for 30 seconds.
NOTE: If the power saver feature is disabled, the option is not displayed. Refer to GP 22 Elec-
trical Power Requirements for further information.
GP 15 How to Set the Machine Configuration
Description
Use this procedure when a new NVM chip has been installed on the IOT PWB or the message
Machine Speed Configuration Error occurs.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP14. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not use the on / off switch as a safety disconnect device. The on/off switch is not a
disconnect device. Disconnect the power cord from the supply to isolate the equipment.
Procedure
1. If the message Machine Speed Configuration Error occurs, then perform the following:
a. Enter diagnostics, GP 1.
b. Re-enter the machine serial number. Refer to the product / serial number plate on
the front frame of the machine. On the Service Info screen, select the serial number
box and enter the machine serial number.
c. Select dC131 chain 3, location 03-008 and check the product identifier. Enter the
correct value.
Select dC131, chain 3, location 03-012 and check the product configuration speed.
Enter the correct machine speed.
Select dC131 chain 8, location 08-001 and check the print rate. Enter the correct
print rate.
NOTE: These settings are password protected. Contact your local service specialist
to obtain the correct passwords.
2. If the message Machine Speed Configuration Error does not occur, perform the follow-
ing:
a. Enter diagnostics, GP 1.
b. Re-enter the machine serial number. Refer to the product / serial number plate on
the front frame of the machine. On the Service Info screen, select the serial number
box and enter the machine serial number.
3. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1.
4. Restore the NVM by using the machine resident diskette supplied with the machine and
the latest .nvb file that was saved, GP 5.
5. Complete the final actions, SCP 6.
July 2005
GP 16 How to Safely Lift or Move Heavy Modules
Purpose
Use this procedure when lifting or moving heavy modules.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14. Disconnect the power cord from the
customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. Sharp edges may be present that can cause injury.
When removing heavy modules from the machine, the following instructions must be observed:
1. Ensure that a suitable stable surface to support the module after removal is located in
close proximity to the machine.
NOTE: Other parts of the machine are not a suitable stable surface.
2. Ensure that the height of the support surface is between 750mm and 1000mm (30 inches
and 39 inches).
3. Ensure that there are no hazards or obstacles between the machine and the support sur-
face.
4. If instructed to remove the module toward the rear of the machine and only one person is
available, the module must be removed while standing at the rear of the machine. If two
people are available, the module may be removed while standing at the front of the
machine.
5. Two people are required if the module is to be lifted on to the floor or lifted from the floor.
July 2005
GP 17 High Frequency Service Items
Purpose
To provide the service engineer with a method to view the service history of the high frequency
service items (HFSI). The service engineer can reset the counters and change the setting of
the maximum life and threshold value of each HFSI item.
Procedure
Enter diagnostics GP 1. Select the Service Info window and touch the HFSI feature to select
the HFSI table.
The five columns in the HFSI table on the display screen are:
The Item column, shows the HFSI item to be tracked.
The Status column, indicates the status of an item relative to its threshold setting. Values
are Off (not tracked), OK or Check.
The Unit column, shows the events that are being used to track the item.
The Actual column, shows the actual count value against the HFSI item.
The Max. Life column, shows the maximum life count value of the HFSI item.
The Actual and Maximum Life count value have a numeric range of 0 to 9999999 for all HFSI
items.
The first item in the HFSI table will be the item that requires attention (if needed) then the item
will be displayed as Check. If the item has not yet reached threshold the OK is displayed.
To change the maximum life or threshold value of each HFSI item, perform the following:
1. Select and highlight the HFSI item to change.
2. Touch the Edit button.
3. Enter the new value using the numeric keypad. The new value will overwrite the existing
value in the table. Touch the Save button to enter the new maximum life or threshold
value into the file. If the entered value is incorrect, press the Undo button. This stops the
process and the old value is retained.
A threshold value of zero indicates that there is no threshold value assigned to the item and the
status will be Off (not tracked).
The maximum life setting and the threshold settings are independent of each other. The
threshold value can exceed the maximum life value.
To reset the HFSI item Actual count value to zero, perform the following:
1. Select and highlight the HFSI item to reset.
2. Touch the Reset button,
3. Touch the OK button to reset the count value to zero.
For details of high frequency service items, refer to SCP 5 Subsystem Maintenance.
July 2005
GP 18 Machine Lubrication
Purpose
To give information on the use of lubricants.
Procedure
CAUTION
Only use lubricants as directed. Incorrect use of lubricants could seriously affect the perfor-
mance of the machine.
Adhere to the following points when performing machine lubrication:
Wear disposable gloves, PL 26.10 Item 10.
Only use lubricants that are specified in the Parts List.
Only lubricate parts of the machine as directed in the relevant RAPs, Repairs and Adjust-
ments etc.
Apply only the smallest amount of lubricant, sufficient to lubricate the parts. To prevent
contamination, remove any surplus lubricant before the machine is run.
Take great care not to contaminate other parts of the machine with the lubricant.
July 2005
GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications
Purpose
To list the paper and media size specifications.
Specifications
NOTE: Check that the paper tray settings match the paper size in the tray.
Table 1 Performance indication. Use this table to determine the meaning of the alpha
numeric codes in Table 2 and Table 3.
Table 2 European papers
Table 3 American papers
Table 4 U.S. paper weight conversion. Use this table to determine approximate equivalent
points in weight specifications other than for U.S. bond weight.
Table 5 Input / output paper sizes. The table defines the paper sizes that are recognized
by the DADH, document glass and the paper trays when using an OCT output device.
Table 6 LCSS output paper sizes. The table defines the paper sizes that can be delivered
to the output trays of an LCSS.
Table 7 HCSS and HCSS BM output paper sizes. The table defines the paper sizes that
can be delivered to the output bins of the HCSS and HCSS BM.
Table 8 Output stock performance. The table shows the media (stock) performance con-
straints for the output. Performance will not be guaranteed for media not listed in the
table. Media that is smaller than 139 mm (5.5 inches) in either the process or cross pro-
cess direction cannot be duplexed.
Table 9. Input document material definitions.
Table 10. Input document quality definitions.
Table 1 Performance indication
Code Description
3 Excellent performance
2 Good performance (Good image quality, some jams and poor stacking)
1 Degraded performance (Image quality defects, increased jams or bad stacking)
X Not recommended (outside specification)
N Size unrecognized and not acceptable
U Size unrecognized but acceptable
Y Size recognized and accepted
Paper Size Paper Weight gsm Feed Direction Paper Type Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 Bypass Duplex LCSS HCSS
HCSSBM
bin 0 and 1
HCSSBM
bin 2 Defects
A4 60 LEF Plain paper 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 Duplex show through
A4 60 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 2 3 3 3 3 Duplex show through
A4 61 gsm - 120 LEF Plain paper 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 None
A4 61 gsm - 120 SEF Plain paper 3 X 3 3 3 3 3 3 None
A4 121 gsm - 200 LEF Plain paper 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 None
A4 201 gsm - 216 LEF / SEF Plain paper X X 2 X 3 3 3 3 None
A4 - LEF / SEF Labels X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
A4 - LEF / SEF Plain transparency X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
A4 - LEF White strip transparency X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
A4 - SEF White strip transparency X X X X X X X X Out of specification
A4 - LEF Paper backed transparency X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
A4 - SEF Paper backed transparency X X X X X X X X Out of specification
Oversize A4 - LEF Tabs 2 X 2 X 3 3 3 X Productivity reduction
Oversize A4 - LEF Covers 2 X 2 X 3 3 3 X Productivity reduction
A3 60 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 3 Curl
A3 161 gsm - 200 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 3 Mis-registration and skew
A5 60 LEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 X Curl
A5 60 SEF Plain paper X X 2 1 3 3 3 X Curl
A5 61 gsm - 120 LEF Plain paper 3 X 3 3 3 3 3 X None
July 2005
A5 61 gsm - 120 SEF Plain paper X X 3 3 3 3 3 X None
A5 121 gsm - 200 LEF Plain paper 2 X 2 2 3 3 3 X None
A5 121 gsm - 200 SEF Plain paper X X 2 1 3 3 3 X Mis-registration and skew
A6 60 LEF Plain paper X X X X 3 3 3 X Out of specification.
A6 60 SEF Plain paper X X 2 1 3 3 3 X Curl
A6 61 gsm - 120 LEF Plain paper X X X X 3 3 3 X Out of specification.
A6 61 gsm - 120 SEF Plain paper X X 3 2 3 3 3 X None
A6 121 gsm - 200 LEF Plain paper X X X X 3 3 3 X Out of specification.
A6 121 gsm - 200 SEF Plain paper X X 1 1 3 3 3 X Poor feeding
A4 60 LEF / SEF Nekosa 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 X Jams
8.5 x 12.4
inch
All SEF Spanish Folio 2 X 2 2 3 3 3 X Not tested
A4 200 LEF / SEF Premier TCF 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 X Poor fusing
All 100 LEF / SEF Conqueror finely ridged laid 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 X Poor fusing
All 80 LEF / SEF Recycled 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 X Excessive curl
Any Any LEF / SEF Jobs with covers 1 X 1 1 3 3 3 X Rear cover of stapled sets of
more than 35 sheets plus 2
covers, may be mis-regis-
tered in the LCSS
Paper Size Paper Weight gsm Feed Direction Paper Type Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 Bypass Duplex LCSS HCSS
HCSSBM
bin 0 and 1
HCSSBM
bin 2 Defects
Paper Size
inches
Paper Weight
US bond lb. Feed Direction Paper Type Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 Bypass Duplex LCSS HCSS
HCSSBM
bin 0 and 1
HCSSBM
bin 2 Defects
8.5 x 11 16 LEF Plain paper 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 Duplex show through
8.5 x 11 16 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 2 3 3 3 3 Duplex show through
8.5 x 11 20 - 32 LEF Plain paper 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 None
8.5 x 11 20 - 32 SEF Plain paper 3 X 3 3 3 3 3 3 None
8.5 x 11 34- 53 LEF Plain paper 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 None
8.5 x 11 34- 53 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 2 3 3 3 3 None
8.5 x 11 57 LEF / SEF Plain paper X X 2 X 3 3 3 3 None
8.5 x 11 - LEF / SEF Labels X X 2 X 3 3 3 3 None (feed to bin 0 only)
8.5 x 11 - LEF / SEF Plain transparency X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
8.5 x 11 - LEF White strip transparency X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
8.5 x 11 - SEF White strip transparency X X X X X X X X Out of specification
8.5 x 11 - LEF Paper backed transpar-
ency
X X 2 X 3 3 3 X None (feed to bin 0 only)
8.5 x 11 - SEF Paper backed transpar-
ency
X X X X X X X X Out of specification
July 2005
Oversize
8.5 x 11
- LEF Tabs 2 X 2 X 3 3 3 X Productivity reduction
Oversize
8.5 x 11
- LEF Covers 2 X 2 X 3 3 3 X Productivity reduction
11 x 17 16 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 3 Curl
11 x 17 20 - 32 SEF Plain paper 3 X 3 3 3 3 3 3 None
11 x 17 34 - 53 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 3 Mis-registration and skew
8.5 x 14 16 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 3 Curl
8.5 x 14 20 - 32 SEF Plain paper 3 X 3 3 3 3 3 3 None
8.5 x 14 34 - 53 SEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 3 Mis-registration and skew
8.5 x 5.5 16 LEF Plain paper 2 X 2 1 3 3 3 X Not tested
8.5 x 5.5 16 SEF Plain paper X X 2 1 3 3 3 X Not tested
8.5 x 5.5 20 - 32 LEF Plain paper 3 X 3 3 3 3 3 X Not tested
8.5 x 5.5 20 - 32 SEF Plain paper X X 3 3 3 3 3 X Not tested
8.5 x 5.5 34 - 53 LEF Plain paper 2 X 2 2 3 3 3 X Not tested
5.5 x 4.25 16 LEF Plain paper X X X X 3 3 3 X Out of specification.
5.5 x 4.25 16 SEF Plain paper X X 2 1 3 3 3 X Not tested
5.5 x 4.25 20 - 32 LEF Plain paper X X X X 3 3 3 X Out of specification.
5.5 x 4.25 34 - 53 LEF Plain paper X X X X 3 3 3 X Out of specification.
11 x 17 32 SEF Domtar (10% recycled) 1 X 1 1 3 3 3 3 Bad stacking due to curl
8.5 x 11 65 LEF / SEF Xerox 65lb cover 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 X Degraded fusing
8.5 x 11 90 LEF / SEF Xerox 90lb index 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 X Degraded fusing
8.5 x 11 110 LEF / SEF Springhill index plus 110lb 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 X Degraded fusing
Any Any LEF / SEF Jobs with covers 1 X 1 1 3 3 3 X Rear cover of stapled sets of
more than 35 sheets plus 2
covers, may be mis-regis-
tered in the LCSS
Table 4 U.S. paper weight conversion
US post card thickness
(mm) (see NOTE)
US bond weight
(lb.)
US text / book weight
(lb.)
US cover weight
(lb.)
US Bristol weight
(lb.)
US index weight
(lb.)
US tag weight
(lb.)
Metric weight
(gsm)
- 16 41 22 27 33 37 60
- 17 43 24 29 35 39 64
- 20 50 28 34 42 46 75
- 21 54 30 36 44 49 80
- 22 56 31 38 46 51 83
- 24 60 33 41 50 55 90
- 27 68 37 45 55 61 100
Paper Size
inches
Paper Weight
US bond lb. Feed Direction Paper Type Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 Bypass Duplex LCSS HCSS
HCSSBM
bin 0 and 1
HCSSBM
bin 2 Defects
July 2005
NOTE: U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
- 28 70 39 49 58 65 105
- 32 80 44 55 67 74 120
- 34 86 47 58 71 79 128
- 36 90 50 62 75 83 135
0.18 39 100 55 67 82 91 148
0.19 42 107 58 72 87 97 158
0.20 43 110 60 74 90 100 163
0.23 47 119 65 80 97 108 176
0.25 51 128 70 86 105 117 190
0.26 53 134 74 90 110 122 199
0.27 54 137 75 93 113 125 203
0.29 58 146 80 98 120 133 216
0.32 65 165 90 111 135 150 244
0.33 66 169 92 114 138 154 250
0.34 67 171 94 115 140 155 253
0.35 70 178 98 120 146 162 264
0.36 72 183 100 123 150 166 271
Table 4 U.S. paper weight conversion
US post card thickness
(mm) (see NOTE)
US bond weight
(lb.)
US text / book weight
(lb.)
US cover weight
(lb.)
US Bristol weight
(lb.)
US index weight
(lb.)
US tag weight
(lb.)
Metric weight
(gsm)
Table 5 Input / output Paper sizes
Paper size Paper size Paper size
Orie
ntati
on
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
Inch (W x L)
+/-1/32 inch
mm (W x L)
+/-1 mm
LEF /
SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
and 4 NASG
Eur /
Asia Latin NASG Eur / Asia Latin OCT -
Letter 8.5 x 11 216 x 279 SEF Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Letter 8.5 x 11 216 x 279 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Ledger 11 x 17 279 x 432 SEF Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Invoice
(statement)
8.5 x 5.5 216 x 138 SEF N Y N Y* Y* Y* Y Y Y Y *ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5 depends on
NVM 2 setting
Invoice
(statement)
8.5 x 5.5 216 x 138 LEF Y Y N Y* Y* Y* Y Y Y Y *ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5 depends on
NVM 2 setting
Postcard 4.25 x 5.5 108 x 140 SEF N Y N N N N Y U U Y -
Postcard 4.25 x 5.5 108 x 140 LEF N N N N N N U U U N Cannot be fed in IOT
Legal 8.5 x 14 216 x 356 SEF Y Y N Y Y Y Y U U Y -
ISO A4 8.26 x 11.69 210 x 297 SEF Y Y N Y* Y* Y* Y Y Y Y *ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13 depends on
NVM 1 setting
ISO A4 8.26 x 11.69 210 x 297 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
July 2005
ISO A3 11.69 x 16.54 297 x 420 SEF Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
ISO A5 5.83 x 8.27 148 x 210 SEF N Y N Y* Y* Y* U Y U Y *ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5 depends on
NVM 2 setting
ISO A5 5.83 x 8.27 148 x 210 LEF Y Y N Y* Y* Y* U Y U Y *ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5 depends on
NVM 2 setting
ISO A6 4.13 x 5.83 105 x 148 SEF N Y N N N N U Y Y Y -
ISO A6 4.13 x 5.83 105 x 148 LEF N N N N N N U U U N -
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.12 182 x 257 SEF U Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.12 182 x 257 LEF U Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
JIS B4 10.12 x 14.33 257 x 364 SEF U Y N U* U* U* Y Y Y Y * Detected as ISO B4
JIS B6 5.08 x 7.17 128 x 182 SEF N Y N N N N Y Y Y Y -
JIS B6 5.08 x 7.17 128 x 182 LEF N N N U* U* U* U U U Y -* Detected as ISO B5
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 176 x 250 SEF N U N Y Y Y U U U Y -
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 176 x 250 LEF U U N Y Y Y U U U Y -
ISO B4 9.84 x 13.9 250 x 353 SEF U U N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
SB4 9.9 x 14.09 252 x 358 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B4
Postcard-
Lakes
4.5 x 6 114 x 152 SEF N U N N N N U U U Y -
Postcard-
Lakes
4.5 x 6 114 x 152 LEF N N N U* U* U* U U U N * Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
depending on NVM 2 setting
Postcard 5 x 7 127 x 178 SEF N U N N N N U U U Y -
Postcard 5 x 7 127 x 178 LEF N N N U* U* U* U U U N * Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
Oufuku-
Hagaki
Postcard
5.83 x 7.87 148 x 200 SEF N U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
Oufuku-
Hagaki
Postcard
5.83 x 7.87 148 x 200 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
6 x 9 inch 6 x 9 152 x 229 SEF N U N U* U* U* U U U U *Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
6 x 9 inch 6 x 9 152 x 229 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
Royal
Octavo
6 x 9.5 152 x 241 SEF N U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5
depends on NVM 2 setting
Royal
Octavo
6 x 9.5 152 x 241 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B5
Foolscap
Quarto
6.5 x 8.25 165 x 206 SEF N U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B5
Orie
ntati
on
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
Inch (W x L)
+/-1/32 inch
mm (W x L)
+/-1 mm
LEF /
SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
and 4 NASG
Eur /
July 2005
Foolscap
Quarto
6.5 x 8.25 165 x 206 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
Crown
Quarto
7.25 x 9.5 184 x 241 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B5
Crown
Quarto
7.25 x 9.5 184 x 241 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B5
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184 x 267 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184 x 267 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51 194 x 267 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51 194 x 267 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
Quarto 8 x 10 203 x 254 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
Quarto 8 x 10 203 x 254 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8 x 10.5 203 x 267 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8 x 10.5 203 x 267 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
8 x 13 inch
foolscap
8 x 13 203 x 330 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8.26 x 10 210 x 254 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8.26 x 10 210 x 254 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8.26 x 10.63 210 x 270 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8.26 x 10.63 210 x 270 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y * Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8.26 x 13 210 x 330 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
Foolscap
Folio
8.25 x 13.06 209 x 333 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7 215 x 273 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7 215 x 273 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as 8.5 x 11
- 8.46 x 10.83 215 x 275 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
- 8.46 x 10.83 215 x 275 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
Folio (Spain) 8.46 x 12.4 215 x 315 SEF Y# U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
depends on NVM 1 setting.
#Detected as 8.5 x 13
- 8.66 x 13 220 x 330 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
- 8.75 x 11.69 223 x 297 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
- 8.75 x 11.69 223 x 297 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
Orie
ntati
on
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
Inch (W x L)
+/-1/32 inch
mm (W x L)
+/-1 mm
LEF /
SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
and 4 NASG
Eur /
July 2005
Arch A 9 x 12 229 x 305 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13
SB4 9.92 x 14.09 252 x 258 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B4
SB4 9.92 x 14.09 252 x 258 LEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B4
Accounting 10 x 14 254 x 356 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B4
- 10 x 15 254 x 381 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B4
8K Taiwan 10.51 x 15.28 267 x 388 SEF U U N U* U* U* U U U Y *Detected as ISO B4
Table 6 LCSS output paper sizes
Paper Size Paper Size Paper Size Orientation Output
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
position Option Output
Common Name Inch (W x L) mm (W x L) LEF / SEF Stack Front Rear Dual Hole punch (all types) Top Tray
Letter 8.5 x 11 216 x 279 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
Letter 8.5 x 11 216 x 279 LEF Y Y N Y Y Y
Ledger 11 x 17 279 x 432 SEF Y Y N Y Y Y
Invoice (statement) 8.5 x 5.5 216 x 140 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Invoice (statement) 8.5 x 5.5 216 x 140 LEF Y Y Y N Y Y
Postcard 4.25 x 5.5 108 x 140 SEF N N N N N Y
Postcard 4.25 x 5.5 108 x 140 LEF N N N N N N
Legal 8.5 x 14 216 x 356 SEF Y Y Y N Y Y
ISO A4 8.26 x 11.69 210 x 297 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
ISO A4 8.26 x 11.69 210 x 297 LEF Y Y N Y Y Y
ISO A3 11.69 x 16.54 297 x 420 SEF Y Y N Y Y Y
ISO A5 5.83 x 8.27 148 x 210 SEF Y Y N N N Y
ISO A5 5.83 x 8.27 148 x 210 LEF Y Y N N N Y
ISO A6 4.13 x 5.83 105 x 148 SEF N N N N N Y
ISO A6 4.13 x 5.83 105 x 148 LEF N N N N N N
Foolscap or Euroletter 8.5 x 13 216 x 330 SEF Y Y Y N Y Y
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.12 182 x 257 SEF Y Y N N N Y
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.12 182 x 257 LEF Y Y N N N Y
JIS B4 10.12 x 14.33 257 x 364 SEF Y Y N N N Y
JIS B6 5.08 x 7.17 128 x 182 SEF N N N N N Y
JIS B6 5.08 x 7.17 128 x 182 LEF N N N N N N
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 176 x 250 SEF Y Y N N N Y
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 176 x 250 LEF Y Y N N N Y
ISO B4 9.84 x 13.9 250 x 353 SEF Y Y N N N Y
SB4 9.92 x 14.09 252 x 358 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Orie
ntati
on
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
Paper
tray size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
DADH
size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Document
glass size
sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
Inch (W x L)
+/-1/32 inch
mm (W x L)
+/-1 mm
LEF /
SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
and 4 NASG
Eur /
July 2005
ISO A4 Cover or Tab 8.78 x 11.69 297 x 223 SEF Y Y N N N Y
ISO A4 Cover or Tab 8.78 x 11.69 297 x 223 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Letter Cover or Tab 9 x 11 229 x 279 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Letter Cover or Tab 9 x 11 229 x 279 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Postcard-Lakes 4.5 x 6 114 x 152 SEF N N N N N Y
Postcard-Lakes 4.5 x 6 114 x 152 LEF N N N N N N
Postcard 5 x 7 127 x 178 SEF N N N N N Y
Postcard 5 x 7 127 x 178 LEF N N N N N N
Oufuku-Hagaki Postcard 5.83 x 7.87 148 x 200 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Oufuku-Hagaki Postcard 5.83 x 7.87 148 x 200 LEF Y Y Y N N Y
6 x 9 inch 6 x 9 152 x 229 SEF Y Y N N N Y
6 x 9 inch 6 x 9 152 x 229 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Royal Octavo 6 x 9.5 152 x 241 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Royal Octavo 6 x 9.5 152 x 241 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Foolscap Quarto 6.5 x 8.25 165 x 206 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Foolscap Quarto 6.5 x 8.25 165 x 206 LEF Y Y Y N N Y
Crown Quarto 7.25 x 9.5 184 x 241 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Crown Quarto 7.25 x 9.5 184 x 241 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184 x 267 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184 x 267 LEF Y Y N N N Y
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51 194 x 267 SEF Y Y N N N Y
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51 194 x 267 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Quarto 8 x 10 203 x 254 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
Quarto 8 x 10 203 x 254 LEF Y Y N N N Y
- 8 x 10.5 203 x 267 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
- 8 x 10.5 203 x 267 LEF Y Y N N N Y
- 8 x 13 203 x 330 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
- 8.26 x 10 210 x 254 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
- 8.26 x 10 210 x 254 LEF Y Y N N N Y
- 8.26 x 10.63 210 x 270 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
- 8.26 x 10.63 210 x 270 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Foolscap Folio 8.25 x 13.06 209 x 333 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
8.26 x 13 210 x 330 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7 215 x 273 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7 215 x 273 LEF Y Y N N N Y
- 8.46 x 10.83 215 x 275 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
- 8.46 x 10.83 215 x 275 LEF Y Y N N N Y
Folio (Spain) 8.46 x 12.4 215 x 315 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
July 2005
- 8.66 x 13 220 x 330 SEF Y Y Y N N Y
- 8.75 x 11.69 223 x 297 SEF Y Y N N N Y
- 8.75 x 11.69 223 x 297 LEF Y Y N Y Y Y
Arch A 9 x 12 229 x 305 SEF Y Y N N N Y
SB4 9.92 x 14.09 252 x 358 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Accounting 10 x 14 254 x 356 SEF Y Y N N N Y
- 10 x 15 254 x 381 SEF Y Y N N N Y
8K Taiwan 10.51 x 15.28 267 x 388 SEF Y Y N N N Y
Table 7 HCSS and HCSS BM output paper sizes
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
position Option Output Output
Common Name Inch (W x L) mm (W x L) LEF / SEF Stack Front Rear Dual Multiple
Hole punch
(all types) Top Tray
Booklet
maker
Letter 8.5 x 11 216 x 279 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Letter 8.5 x 11 216 x 279 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Ledger 11 x 17 279 x 432 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Invoice (statement) 8.5 x 5.5 216 x 140 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
Invoice (statement) 8.5 x 5.5 216 x 140 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Postcard 4.25 x 5.5 108 x 140 SEF N N N N N N Y N
Postcard 4.25 x 5.5 108 x 140 LEF N N N N N N N N
Legal 8.5 x 14 216 x 356 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
ISO A4 8.26 x 11.69 210 x 297 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
ISO A4 8.26 x 11.69 210 x 297 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
ISO A3 11.69 x 16.54 297 x 420 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
ISO A5 5.83 x 8.27 148 x 210 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
ISO A5 5.83 x 8.27 148 x 210 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
ISO A6 4.13 x 5.83 105 x 148 SEF N N N N N N Y N
ISO A6 4.13 x 5.83 105 x 148 LEF N N N N N N N N
Foolscap or Euroletter 8.5 x 13 216 x 330 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.12 182 x 257 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.12 182 x 257 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
JIS B4 10.12 x 14.33 257 x 364 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
JIS B6 5.08 x 7.17 128 x 182 SEF N N N N N N Y N
JIS B6 5.08 x 7.17 128 x 182 LEF N N N N N N N N
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 176 x 250 SEF Y Y N N N N Y N
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 176 x 250 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
ISO B4 9.84 x 13.9 250 x 353 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
July 2005
ISO A4 Cover 8.78 x 11.69 297 x 223 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
ISO A4 Cover or Tab (tabs
leading)
8.78 x 11.69 297 x 223 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Letter Cover 9 x 11 229 x 279 SEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Letter Cover or Tab (tabs lead-
ing)
9 x 11 229 x 279 LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Postcard-Lakes 4.5 x 6 114 x 152 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
Postcard-Lakes 4.5 x 6 114 x 152 LEF N N N N N N N N
Postcard 5 x 7 127 x 178 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
Postcard 5 x 7 127 x 178 LEF N N N N N N N N
Oufuku-Hagaki Postcard 5.83 x 7.87 148 x 200 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
Oufuku-Hagaki Postcard 5.83 x 7.87 148 x 200 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
6 x 9 inch 6 x 9 152 x 229 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
6 x 9 inch 6 x 9 152 x 229 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Royal Octavo 6 x 9.5 152 x 241 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
Royal Octavo 6 x 9.5 152 x 241 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Foolscap Quarto 6.5 x 8.25 165 x 206 SEF Y N N N N N Y N
Foolscap Quarto 6.5 x 8.25 165 x 206 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Crown Quarto 7.25 x 9.5 184 x 241 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Crown Quarto 7.25 x 9.5 184 x 241 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184 x 267 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184 x 267 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51 194 x 267 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51 194 x 267 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Quarto 8 x 10 203 x 254 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Quarto 8 x 10 203 x 254 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8 x 10.5 203 x 267 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8 x 10.5 203 x 267 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8 x 13 203 x 330 SEF Y Y Y Y N N Y N
- 8.26 x 10 210 x 254 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.26 x 10 210 x 254 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.26 x 10.63 210 x 270 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.26 x 10.63 210 x 270 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Foolscap Folio 8.25 x 13.06 209 x 333 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
8.26 x 13 210 x 330 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7 215 x 273 SEF Y Y Y Y N N Y N
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7 215 x 273 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.46 x 10.83 215 x 275 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
Hole punch
Booklet
maker
July 2005
- 8.46 x 10.83 215 x 275 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Folio (Spain) 8.46 x 12.4 215 x 315 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.66 x 13 220 x 330 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.75 x 11.69 223 x 297 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 8.75 x 11.69 223 x 297 LEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Arch A 9 x 12 229 x 305 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
SB4 9.92 x 14.09 252 x 358 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Accounting 10 x 14 254 x 356 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
- 10 x 15 254 x 381 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
8K Taiwan 10.51 x 15.28 267 x 388 SEF Y Y Y Y Y N Y N
Custom size, cross process
direction (minimum)
4.13 105 N N N N N N N Y N
Custom size, process direction
(minimum)
5.5 138 N N N N N N N Y N
Custom size, cross process
direction (maximum)
11.69 297 N N N N N N N Y N
Custom size, process direction
(maximum)
17.01 432 N N N N N N N Y N
Table 8 Output stock performance
Stock Type Trays 1 and 2 Bypass Trays 3 and 4 Duplex Offset Stack Staple Hole punch Notes
Bond/standard 70 gsm to 90 gsm (16 lbs
to 24 lbs)
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Index Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Recycled Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Transparency (non paper backed) N Y N N Y (1) (2) Y (1) (3) N N (1). An increase in set scatter or set
to set registration may occur with
greater than 20 sheets
(2). LCSS only
(3). Top tray only for HCSS
Transparency (paper backed) N Y N N Y (1) (2) Y (1) (3) N N Must be fed with sealed edge lead-
ing. Must not be inverted.
(1) An increase in set scatter or set to
set registration may occur with
greater than 20 sheets
(2). LCSS only
(3). Top tray only for HCSS
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
position
Staple
Hole punch
Booklet
maker
July 2005
Labels N (4) Y N N N Y (2) N N Must not be inverted.
(2) LCSS = Top tray only.
HCSS = Top tray only
(4). Except for hospital labels
Card stock, 120 gsm to 200 gsm Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -
Card stock, 216 gsm N Y N N Y Y Y Y -
Tabs Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Tabs must be on trail edge when fed
from trays and bypass, but lead edge
when arriving at the output. Therefore
tab stock will be inverted before out-
put. Hole punch registration perfor-
mance may be degraded
Punched Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N -
Envelopes No. 10 size
envelopes only
from tray 2 with
an optional
envelope insert
kit
Y N N Y Y (3) N N Must not be inverted
(3) LCSS = Top tray only.
No. 10 size envelopes NASG/XCL,
(32-55 ppm) only
Table 9 Input document material definitions
Category Material Image Type
Group I. Common usage input. 80 gsm (20lb.) to 120gsm (32lb.) or equivalent weight range (rag bond
offset and ledger paper). This group includes 4040 paper.
Impact typewriter, offset image, Xerographic image, gravure image, Letter-
press image, pencil 2H or harder, ballpoint pen, ink pen.
Group II. Heavy weight common usage
input.
121gsm (32.1lb.) to 200gsm (110lb.) index or equivalent weight range
(rag bond and ledger paper).
Group III. Light weight common usage
input.
60gsm (16lb) to 79gsm (19.9lb.) bond or equivalent weight range (rag
bond, offset, mimo/duplicator, and NCR paper).
Group IV. Common surface finished paper. 60gsm (16lb) to 200gsm (110lb.) index or equivalent (Bristol text, maga-
zine, cover, vellum, safety paper)
Group V. Uncommon and other input. 80 gsm (20lb.) to 200gsm (110lb.) or equivalent weight: plastic laminated
paper: metallic cover stock: tag stock: plastic transparencies: Telecopier
paper: label stock: silver photographic paper: Electrofax paper (ZnO)
race-erase: paste ups with loose edges type 1, 2 & 3: XE approved
punched or perforated stock: Continuous computer forms.
press image, pencil 2H or harder, ballpoint pen, ink pen. Liquid developed
electrostatic image.
Group VI. Light weight input. 49gsm (13lb.) to 59gsm 15.9lb.) bond or equivalent weight range (rag
bond, ledger mimeo or GSE papers).
Group VII.
34gsm (9lb) to 48gsm (12.9lb) bond or equivalent weight range (rag
bond, ledger mimeo or GSE papers).
Table 10 Input document quality definitions
Defect Acceptable Marginal Unacceptable Notes
Holes. Maximum of three cleanly punched
holes up to 6mm. (0.25 inch) diameter.
Four to nine cleanly punched holes. Rough or torn holes. -
Table 8 Output stock performance
Stock Type Trays 1 and 2 Bypass Trays 3 and 4 Duplex Offset Stack Staple Hole punch Notes
July 2005
Staples. Cleanly removed staples. Poorly removed staples resulting in dog-
ears*.
Staples not removed.
Edge defects. None. Any cut or tear near a corner less than 3mm.
(0.125 inch) in length.
Any cut or tear not at a corner or greater than 3
mm. (0.125 inch) in length,
-
Folds* (in the
feed direction).
Two letter folds less than 1.5 mm.
(0.062 inch) high.
Two letter folds less than 3mm. (0.125 inch)
high.
Any fold greater than 3mm. (0.125 inch) high. * Folds must be flattened to within
6mm (0.25 inch) height before plac-
ing in the input device.
Folds* (across
the feed direc-
tion)
None. One fold not to exceed 3mm. (0.125 inch)
high.
Any fold greater than 3mm. (0.125 inch) high. * Folds must be flattened to within
Curl (measured
from a flat sur-
face).
None. In-ream or inherent curl up to 13mm. (0.5
inch) maximum.
- Curl greater than 13mm.
Wrinkle. None. Multiple moderate wrinkles, up to 38mm. (1.5
inch) long in any direction, 3mm. (0.125 inch)
in height.
Severe wrinkles greater than 38mm. (1.5 inch)
long in any direction, greater than 3mm. (0.125
inch) in height
-
Foreign material
on the surface.
None. Hole reinforcement, correction fluid or dry
glue no greater than 13 square millimetres.
(0.02 square inch) per correction.
Correction tape major paste-up or correction
fluid greater than 13 square millimetres. (0.02
square inch) per correction.
-
Bent corners
(dog-ears)*
No bent corners One bent corner up to 75mm. (3 inch) diago-
nal length
One or more bent corner exceeding 75mm. (3
inch) diagonal length.
* Dog ears must be flattened to within
Computer fan
fold sheets
- Perforated tractor feed edges cleanly
removed.
Perforated tractor feed edges not removed. -
Table 10 Input document quality definitions
Defect Acceptable Marginal Unacceptable Notes
July 2005
GP 21 Installation Space Requirements
Purpose
To outline the general space requirements to enable safe use and adequate access for service.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
WARNING
USA and Canada. Do not install this machine in a hallway or exit route that does not
have 1.12 m (44 inches) of space additional to the normal space requirements in front of
the machine. To conform with fire regulations this additional 1.12 m (44 inches) of space
is needed in front of the machine in hallway and exit routes.
Machine Height
CC232-WCP255
Machine height with the platen lowered = 1010mm (39.6 inches)
Machine height with the platen raised = 1400mm (55.1 inches)
Machine height with the DADH lowered = 1110 mm (43.7 inches)
Machine height with the DADH raised = 1453 mm (57.2 inches)
CC265-WCP275
Machine height with the DADH lowered = 1107 mm (43.5 inches)
Machine height with the DADH raised = 1451 mm (57.1 inches)
Machine Weight
CC232-WCP255
Basic machine weight = 110 kg (242.5 lbs.)
Fully configured machine weight = 125 kg (276 lbs.)
NOTE: Machine weight does not include the weight of the finisher.
CC265-WCP275
Basic machine weight = 125 kg (276 lbs.)
Fully configured machine weight = 131 kg (289 lbs.)
NOTE: Machine weight does not include the weight of the finisher.
Finishers
OCT = 2 kg (4.5 lbs.)
1K LCSS = 23 kg (51 lbs.)
2K LCSS = 30 kg (66.5 lbs.)
HCSS = 58 kg (128 lbs.)
HCSS BM = 79 kg (174.5 lbs.)
July 2005
Machine dimensions and Installation Space Requirements
Refer to the relevant subsection:
CC232-WCP255 Machine Installation and Space Requirements
Table 1 shows the dimensions of the CC232-WCP255 machines and the installation space
required for safe operation.
NOTE: The dimensions shown in Table 1 allow for a 1 metre (39.5 inches) minimum safety
workspace around the machine. To acquire the minimum safety workspace it may be neces-
sary to move the machine within the area specified.
Figure 1 represents a plan view of a machine installation and is to be read in conjunction with
Table 1. The dimensions A and B outline a footprint of the machine within the boundary of safe
operation, dimensions C and D. The dimension E indicates the area required for airflow / work-
space at the rear of the machine.
Figure 1 Installation plan CC232-WCP255
Table 1 CC232-WCP255
Configuration
Machine width
(A) mm / inches
Machine depth
(B) mm / inches
Install width required
(C) mm / inches
Install depth required
(D) mm / inches
Install airflow / service workspace
(E) mm / inches
Moveable Fixed Moveable Fixed Moveable Fixed
CC232-CC255 with OCT 955 / 37.6 650 / 25.6 1955 / 77 2955 / 116.3 1650 / 65 2650 / 104.3 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
CC232-CC255 with 1K LCSS 1214 / 47.8 650 / 25.6 2214 / 87.2 3214 / 126.5 1650 / 65 2650 / 104.3 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
CC232-CC255 with 2K LCSS 1214 / 47.8 650 / 25.6 2214 / 87.2 3214 / 126.5 1650 / 65 2650 / 104.3 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
CC232-CC255 with HCSS BM 1420 / 55.9 650 / 25.6 2420 / 95.3 3420 / 134.6 1650 / 65 2650 / 104.3 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC232-WCP255 with OCT 1240 / 48.8 742 / 29.2 2240 / 88.2 3240 / 127.6 1742 / 68.6 2742 / 108.0 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC232-WCP255 with 1K LCSS 1499 / 59.0 742 / 29.2 2499 / 98.4 3499 / 137.8 1742 / 68.6 2742 / 108.0 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC232-WCP255 with 2K LCSS 1499 / 59.0 742 / 29.2 2499 / 98.4 3499 / 137.8 1742 / 68.6 2742 / 108.0 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC232-WCP255 with HCSS BM 1705 / 67.1 742 / 29.2 2705 / 106.5 3705 / 145.9 1742 / 68.6 2742 / 108.0 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
Front
July 2005
Table 2 shows the dimensions of the CC265-WCP275 machines and the installation space
required for safe operation.
NOTE: The installation dimensions in Table 2 allow for a 1 metre (39.5 inches) minimum safety
workspace around the machine. To acquire this minimum safety workspace it may be neces-
sary to move the machine within the area specified.
Figure 2 represents a plan view of a machine installation and is to be read in conjunction with
Table 2. The dimensions A and B outline a footprint of the machine within the boundary of safe
operation, dimensions C and D. The dimension E indicates the area required for airflow / work-
space at the rear of the machine.
Figure 2 Installation plan CC265-WCP275
Table 2 Installation dimensions CC265-WCP275
Configuration
Machine width
(A) mm / inches
Machine depth
(B) mm / inches
Install width required
(C) mm / inches
Install depth required
(D) mm / inches
Install airflow / service workspace
(E) mm / inches
Moveable Fixed Moveable Fixed Moveable Fixed
CC265 with OCT 1007 / 39.6 728 / 28.6 2007 / 79.0 3007 / 118.4 1728 / 68.0 2728 / 107.4 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
CC265-CC275 with 2K LCSS 1257 / 49.5 728 / 28.6 2257 / 88.9 3257 / 128.2 1728 / 68.0 2728 / 107.4 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
CC265-CC275 with HCSS 1402.55.2 728 / 28.6 2402 / 94.6 3402 / 133.9 1728 / 68.0 2728 / 107.4 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
CC265-CC275 with HCSS BM 1457 / 57.4 728 / 28.6 2457 / 96.7 3457 / 136.1 1728 / 68.0 2728 / 107.4 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC265-WCP265 with OCT 1007 / 39.6 735 / 28.9 2007 / 79.0 3007 / 118.4 1735 / 68.3 2735 / 107.7 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC265-WCP275 with 2K LCSS 1257 / 49.5 735 / 28.9 2257 / 88.9 3257 / 128.2 1735 / 68.3 2735 / 107.7 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC265-WCP275 with HCSS 1402 / 55.2 735 / 28.9 2402 / 94.6 3402 / 133.9 1735 / 68.3 2735 / 107.7 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
WC265-WCP275 with HCSS BM 1457 / 57.4 735 / 28.9 2457 / 96.7 3457 / 136.1 1735 / 68.3 2735 / 107.7 100 / 3.94 1000 / 39.4
Front
July 2005
GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements
Power Requirements
Refer to Table 1 and Table 2.
Power Save Modes
There are three customer adjustable power save modes which default to the time values
shown, refer to Table 2 for power consumption of all modes:
Low Power Mode
The low power mode is automatically entered after 15 minutes of non-activity. image process-
ing disk off, IOT +24V disabled, ROS motor off, fuser to low power. The mode of power is
returned to standby following a user request, a key press on the user interface or network
activity.
Sleep Mode (system product)
The sleep mode is automatically entered after 60 minutes of non-activity after entry into low
power mode. The mode of power is returned to standby following a user request, a key press
on the user interface or network activity.
Table 1 Electrical power requirements
Nominal Voltage Average current Comments
110VAC 60Hz. Less than or equal to 20A RMS. Specific XLA markets only.
127VAC 60Hz. Less than or equal to 20A RMS. Mandatory for Saudi Arabia only.
127VAC 60Hz. Less than or equal to 20A RMS. To operate at 127VAC +10% for long
periods. Mandatory for Mexico only.
120VAC 60Hz. Less than or equal to 16A RMS. Run mode, USA and Canada.
120VAC 60Hz. Less than or equal to 20A RMS. Warm up, All 60Hz markets including
USA and Canada.
220VAC 50Hz. Less than or equal to 10A RMS. Europe and other 50Hz markets.
230VAC 50Hz. Less than or equal to 10A RMS Europe and other 50Hz markets.
240VAC 50Hz. Less than or equal to 10A RMS. Europe and other 50Hz markets.
July 2005
Auto-off Mode (digital copier product)
The auto-off mode is automatically entered after 60 minutes of non-activity after entry into low
power mode. Returned to standby following on / off switch pressed (invoking warm-up and ini-
tialization).
Table 2 Power consumption in all modes
Configuration
Run mode
(Watt)
Standby
(Watt) Low power (Watt) Sleep (Watt) Auto off (Watt) Plug-in-mode (Watt)
Digital copier, 32cpm. 1100 220 Less than 118 Less than or equal to 8 Less than or equal to 2 Less than or equal to 1
Digital copier, 38cpm. 1100 220 Less than 139 Less than or equal to 9.5 Less than or equal to 2 Less than or equal to 1
Digital copier, 45cpm. 1195 234 178 Less than or equal to 11.25 Less than or equal to 2 Less than or equal to 1
Digital copier, 75cpm. 1750 240 Less than or equal
to 273
Less than or equal to 18.75 Less than or equal to 2 Less than or equal to 1
Multi function product or digital copier with FAX, 32cpm. 1200 290 Less than 150 Less than or equal to 28.6 Less than or equal to 2 Less than or equal to 1
Multi function product or digital copier with FAX, 38cpm. 1200 290 Less than 171 Less than or equal to 33.4 Less than or equal to 2 Less than or equal to
Additional power for 1K LCSS 65 10 0 0 0 0
Additional power for 2K LCSS 65 10 0 0 0 0
Additional power for HCSS 200 20 0 0 0 0
Additional power for HCSS BM 200 25 0 0 0 0
July 2005
6-53 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) GP 23, GP 24
GP 23 Environmental Data
Operating
Temperature range: 10 to 32 degrees C (50 to 90 degrees F)
Humidity: 15 to 85% RH.
Noise:
NOTE: Blue Angel criteria measured in accordance with ISO 7779
Table 1 contains the maximum value in decibels of noise that can be generated by
the basic machine.
Table 2 contains the maximum value in decibels of noise that can be generated by
the machine in other configurations.
Altitude: 0 to 1829 metres (0 to 6000 feet)
Storage
Temperature and humidity range:
66 degrees C (150 degrees F) 90% RH max.
-29 degrees C (-20 degrees F) 15% RH max.
Altitude: 0 to 3048 metres (0 to 10000 feet).
GP 24 Memory Resources
Purpose
Table 1 contains the recommended minimum EPC memory required for normal and complex
jobs.
Table 1 Noise limits (dBA), basic machine
PPM Standby Run continuous Run impulse
32 35 52 55
38 35 54 57
45 35 57 66
55 40 59 69
65 40 60 63
75 40 63 66
Table 2 Maximum noise limits (dBA), all configurations
PPM Standby Run continuous Run impulse
32 35 60 65
38 35 60 65
45 35 60 65
55 40 63 68
65 40 63 68
75 40 63 72
Table 1 Minimum memory
System Configuration Job type
Recommended
minimum memory
Digital copier Normal random office jobs Standard 256 Mb
Digital copier Frequent stress jobs.
Large complex copy jobs with more
than 60 originals of Letter size Newslet-
ter demo original type and a combina-
tion of the jobs below.
Image rotation e.g. Legal - N up
Letter auto reduction - Simplex to
duplex
Build job - sample set
256 Mb
Digital copier / printer or
digital copier / printer /
scan
Normal random office jobs Standard 256 Mb
Digital copier / printer or
digital copier / printer /
scan
Frequent stress jobs.
Large complex copy jobs with more
than 60 originals of Letter size Newslet-
ter demo original type and a combina-
tion of the jobs below.
Image rotation e.g. Legal - N up
Letter auto reduction - Simplex to
duplex
Build job - sample set
Secure or delay print
256 Mb or 512 Mb
Digital copier or printer
or digital copier / printer /
scan
Frequent stress jobs where memory is
already 512Mb but users receive frequent
memory related messages e.g.:
Resources low, will start shortly
Please wait your job will start shortly
System memory is full. Please wait
while memory resources are made
available to continue your job. Do not
press the start button again the scanner
will automatically or touch cancel your
job.
512 Mb
July 2005
GP 25 First Copy / Print Out Time and Power On / Off Time
The first copy out time (FCOT) is the duration from the start copy request to the delivery of the
first copy in the OCT. Values in Table 1 are based on a standard job where the original is cop-
ied at 100% from the document glass or DADH onto A4 LEF paper fed from the bypass tray.
The first print out time (FPOT) is the duration from the print job request to the delivery of the
print in the OCT. FPOT values in Table 1 are based on a 1 byte ASCII text file sent using TCP/
IP and LPR, from a Pentium II 128Mb NT 4.0 PC with 100Mb Ethernet.
Table 1 Machine timing
Description Response time 32 / 38 ppm Response time 45 / 55 ppm Response time 65 / 75 ppm Notes
FCOT from the document glass. Less than or equal to 4.6 sec-
onds.
Less than or equal to 3.4 sec-
onds.
Less than or equal to 2.9 sec-
onds.
A4 sheet, bypass tray to OCT no invert.
FCOT from the DADH. Less than 9.9 seconds. Less than or equal to 7.3 sec-
onds.
Less than 5.8 seconds. A4 sheet, bypass tray to OCT no invert.
FPOT. Less than 11 seconds. Less than 10 seconds Less than 8 seconds A4 sheet, bypass tray to OCT no invert.
Warm up from low power mode. Less than 30 seconds (1 second
for UI response).
Less than 30 seconds (1 second
for UI response).
Less than 30 seconds (1 second
for UI response).
From low power mode to ready to copy or print.
Internet FAX. Server FAX and scan to file are also
available when the system is ready to print.
Warm up from sleep mode. Less than or equal to 30 seconds
(15 seconds for UI response).
Less than or equal to 30 seconds
Less than or equal to 45 seconds
From sleep mode to ready to print or copy. Server
FAX and scan to file are also available when the
system is ready to print.
Power on time. Less than or equal to 30 seconds. Less than or equal to 45 seconds. Less than or equal to 45 seconds. From power on to ready to copy.
Power on time. Less than or equal to 2 minutes
and 45 seconds.
Less than or equal to 2 minutes
and 45 seconds.
and 45 seconds.
From power on to ready to print. Server FAX and
scan to file are also available when the system is
ready to print.
Power on time. Less than or equal to 3 minutes
40 seconds.
40 seconds.
40 seconds.
From power on to configuration report.
Power off time, digital copier. Less than or equal to 10 seconds. Less than or equal to 10 seconds. Less than or equal to 10 seconds. -
Power off time, multi functional
machine.
Less than or equal to 35 seconds. Less than or equal to 45 seconds. Less than or equal to 45 seconds. -
Quick restart time. Less than or equal to 30 seconds. Less than or equal to 30 seconds. Less than or equal to 45 seconds. From re-start option confirmed, to ready to print or
copy. Server FAX and scan to file are also available
when the system is ready to print.
FAX power on time Less than or equal to 30 seconds. Less than or equal to 30 seconds. Less than or equal to 30 seconds.
July 2005
6-55 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC001, dC104

dC001 Reset Auditron Master PIN
Purpose
To reset the Auditron and the System Administration password to the default, (1111).
NOTE: The Auditron and the System Administration password is the same item.
Procedure
2. Select Diagnostic Routines, select Other Routines, select 001 Reset Auditron Master PIN.
3. Select Reset Auditron Master PIN.
4. Select confirm or cancel.
dC104 Modal Usage Counters
Purpose
To list counters that provide information about features of the machine that have been used by
the customer.
Procedure
2. Select Diagnostic Routines, select Other Routines, select 104 Modal Usage Counters.
The modal usage counters screen displays, showing the list of counters and the amount
of use.
July 2005
6-56 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC109
dC109 Embedded Fax Protocol Report
Purpose
This procedure allows the CSE to print out the Protocol reports for both line 1 and line 2 if con-
figured. The protocol report contains the protocol information about the last fax transmission
whether it was a send or receive job. The protocol report contains the following:
Date and time
The last local ID and name of the transaction for line 1 or line 2.
A firmware version listing for FPGA, application, boot code and hardware.
The Job details with the job, line, Fax number, start time and duration. The results column
will show the speed of the communications to the remote machine and the connection
status. The EQM column will show the EQM value to determine the line quality.
The communication summary with the time and a local and remote column. The local and
remote columns will display abbreviations refer to Table 1.
Procedure
2. Select Diagnostic Routines.
3. Select Fax dC Routines, select 109 Protocol Report.
4. Select Protocol Report Line 1 or Protocol Report Line 2 if configured for 2 lines, then
select, Print Report.
5. The Print Report button greys out until the job has been submitted. The Fax card builds
the protocol report job and places the job in the Fax NVM. This is the equivalent of an
active Fax job in the Fax card queue. The job does not print, it remains in the queue until
the Fax card exits diagnostics.
6. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1.
7. The protocol report prints out.
Analyse the Protocol Report.
For an example of a send and a receive Fax protocol report, refer to Figure 1 or Figure 2.
In Job Details:
The results column also shows the line speed (i.e. 1440 bps).
The EQM column indicates the line quality (i.e. if the value is greater than 5xxx, then the
line quality is poor).
In Communications summary:
The time column records the time at which each event occurs, from the start of the com-
munication.
The local and remote column shows the G3 protocol command or response with a direc-
tion arrow. Refer to Table 1 for the description of the abbreviations.
The FCF column providing a Hex value of the data information contained in the G3 fac-
simile checking field.
the FIF column providing a Hex value of the data information contained in the G3 facsim-
ile information field.
Identify the fault and refer to the appropriate RAP:
If the Protocol Report is blank, go to RAP 20AFax Entry.
If the Protocol Report gives errors that show that the Fax is not able send a Fax, go to
RAP 20B Unable To Send A Fax.
If the Protocol Report gives errors that show that it is unable to receive a Fax, go to RAP
20D Unable To Receive A Fax.
If the EQM column in the Job details, gives a code of greater than 5xxx, go to RAP 20D
Unable To Receive A Fax.
Figure 1 Send Fax protocol report
July 2005
Figure 2 Receive Fax protocol report
Table 1 Local and remote abbreviations
Term Description
ANSam Modulated answer tone
CED Called terminal identification
CFR Confirmation to receive
CI Call indicator
CIG Calling subscriber indentation
CJ CM terminator
CM Call menu
CNG Calling tone
CRP Command repeat
CSI Called subscriber identified
CTC Continue to correct
CTR Response for continue to correct
DCN Disconnect
DCS Digital command signal
DIS Digital identification signal
DTC Digital transmit command
EOM End of message
EOP End of procedure
EOR End of retransmission
EQM Eye quality monitor (measures the quality of the line)
ERR Response for end of transmission
FCD Facsimile coded data
FCF Fax Code Field
FIF Fax Information Field
FTT Failure to train
JM Joint menu
MCF Message confirmation
MPS Multi page signal
NSC Non to standard facilities command
NSF Non to standard facilities
NSS Non to standard setup
PID Procedure interrupt
PIN Procedure interrupt negative
PIP Procedure interrupt positive
PPS Partial page signal
PPR Partial page request
PRI-EOM Procedure interrupt to EOM
PRI-EOP Procedure interrupt to EOP
PRI-MPS Procedure interrupt to MPS
PWD Password for (polling)
PWD Password for (transmission)
RCP Return to control for partial page
RNR Receive not ready
RR Receive ready
RTN Retrain negative
RTP Retrain positive
SEP Selective polling
SUB Subaddress
TCF Training check
TSI Transmitting subscriber identification
Table 1 Local and remote abbreviations
Term Description
July 2005
dC111 Tag Matrix
Purpose
This NVM store provides the CSE with a means to enter, store, delete and retrieve Tag Num-
bers that show which hardware and software upgrades are incorporated in the machine.
Description
NOTE: This store is not deleted during a dustoff procedure, dC132 NVM initialisation.
Tags are issued with a module identifying prefix and number as follows:
Processor module to 001 to 250.
DADH module to D001 to D050.
Finisher module to F001 to F050.
Network controller to N001 to N050
The tag numbers are stored in areas defined by module and are entered into the Tag Matrix dC
111 without the prefix.
Refer to the procedure Tags. This contains a list of Tag numbers together with an description of
each of the modifications.
Procedure
2. Select Diagnostic Routines, select Other Routines, select dC111Tag Matrix.
3. Select the appropriate module button, and follow the on screen instructions.
dC131 NVM Read/Write
Purpose
To review and modify values within the machine configuration and control parameters stored in
NVM.
NOTE: This does not include customer administration or accounting data, these are accessible
from the billing and auditron facilities, refer to the User Guide.
Description
Each NVM item is identified using a chain and location code in the form XX-XXX, where XX- is
the chain prefix, and -XXX is an identifier in the range 001 to 999. For example 09-245. Refer
to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files.
Procedure
1. Save the NVM to disk, GP 5.
4. Select required dC routine category:
Copier Routines.
Other Routines.
5. Select the appropriate button for the NVM chain to be viewed.
6. Use the scroll buttons to view the other NVM locations of the chain.
Use the keyboard to type the three digit identifier code into the Find: field and then
touch the Find: button. This puts the found NVM value at the top of the list.
NOTE: Press the keypad C button to reset the Find: button to 000.
7. Touch the selected NVM in the list, and touch the Read/Write button.
The Read/Write window will open for editable NVM, and the Read Only window will
open for Read Only (protected) NVM.
8. Refer to the tables that follow for NVM chain locations and parameters:
NVM Tables Chains 1 to 10 dC131a.
NVM Tables Chains 12 to 28 dC131b.
Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (1 of 5) dC131c
Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (2 of 5) dC131d.
Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (3 of 5) dC131e.
Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (4 of 5) dC131f.
Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (5 of 5) dC131g.
9. When the values of an editable NVM have been changed, switch off the machine, then
switch on the machine, GP 14, to check and evaluate the changes made to the NVM.
July 2005
6-59 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131, dC131a
NOTE: If the NVM default characters exceed 10 characters only the first eight characters are
displayed in the list. The full string is displayed in the Read/Write window.
NOTE: Selecting Reset will cause the selected NVM location to be reset to its default value.
Selecting Cancel closes the window and cancels any changes made in the now closed win-
dow.
NOTE: The CSE cannot read or modify any NVM that contains customer administrative or
accounting data.
NOTE: The Read Only (protected) NVM can only be changed using a password obtained from
Xerox. Protected NVM cannot be reset from dC132 NVM initialisation.
dC131a NVM Tables Chain 1 to 10
General
1. Refer to the following for NVM parameters chain 1 to 10:
NVM chain 1 Table 1
NVM chain 2 Table 2
NVM chain 3 Table 3
NVM chain 5 Table 4
NVM chain 6 Table 5
NVM chain 7 Table 6
NVM chain 8 Table 7
NVM chain 9 Table 8
NVM chain 10 Table 9
Table 1 NVM chain 1
Location NVM Name NVM Description Value Default
01-001 Power Save
Enable
Defines whether power save is
enabled
0=disabled
1=enabled
1
Table 2 NVM chain 2
02-001 Printer Language - 0 0
02-002 Edit E-mail From If user is network authenti-
cated, but search on UID
failed, enable the From button.
XXXXXX machines only
0=disabled
1=enabled
0
02-003 Enable Delete Job Flag to enable/disable the
deletion of jobs
0=disabled
1=enabled
1
02-004 EditFromGuest Enables/disables editing of e-
mail from guest. XXXXXX
machines only
0=disabled
1=enabled
0
Table 3 NVM chain 3
03-001 Foreign Interface Determines whether foreign
interface is configured
0=disabled
1=enabled
0
03-003 Market Region Defines market region. Pass-
word protected
0=USCO,
1=XCL, 2=FX,
3=FXAPO,
4=ACO, 5=XE
0
July 2005
6-60 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131a
03-004 System Config Defines type of system. 0=Digital Copier,
1=Multi-Func-
tional Device,
2=Printer,
3=Scan Server,
4=OEM Scan-
ner, 5=OEM-
Printer, 6=OEM
MultiFunction,
7=Atlanta Only
0
03-005 System Install
Phase
Defines system's current instal-
lation phase.
0=manfg, 1=FIC,
2=Customer
Install, 3=Cus-
tomer Setup,
4=Install Com-
plete
0
03-006 Auto Configuration Determines if the system runs
through auto configuration,
detect at power on
0=disabled
1=enabled
1
03-007 Value Added
Reseller
Defines installation's value
added reseller. Password pro-
tected.
0 to 255 255
03-008 Product Identifier Sets the product identifier. This
is used to identify the printer
type over the network (through
the sysObjectID Object).
Password protected.
NOTE: For machine identifica-
tion, refer to SCP 7 Machine
Features.
BMF = Basic Multi Function
AMF = Advanced Multi Func-
tion
PS = Post Script
71=WCP65AMF
72=WCP75AMF
73=WC65BMF
74=WC75BMF
75=WC65BMF+
PS
76=WC75BMF+
PS
77=WC32BMF
78=WC38BMF
79=WC45BMF
80=WC55BMF
81=WC32BMF+
PS
82=WC38BMF+
PS
83=WC45BMF+
PS
84=WC55BMF+
PS
85=WCP32AMF
86=WCP38AMF
87=WCP45AMF
88=WCP55AMF
73
03-009 Install Client Defines current client of system
installation
0 to 255 0
Table 3 NVM chain 3
03-010 SVC Copy Mode
PIN
Service copy mode entry code.
Normally the reverse of the
diagnostic entry code
1000 to
999999999
4391
03-011 Auto Hold Enable Hold job queue if resources
unavailable
0=disable
1=enable
1
03-012 Prod config
(speed)
Defines product configuration
(processing speed). 08-001
must be set to the same speed.
32=32ppm
35=35ppm
38=38ppm
45=45ppm
55=55ppm
65=65ppm
75=75ppm
33
03-013 Doc Handler Con-
fig
Defines if the DADH or docu-
ment cover is present, Auto
select
0=DADH 1=Doc.
cover
1
03-014 Inverter Switch Determines if sheets delivered
face up (non inverted) or face
down (inverted)
0=face up
1=face down
1
03-015 SIP Machine
Model
Machine Configuration Setting
Password protected
Range 0 to 5 0
03-016 SIP Machine Type Machine Type Setting
Password protected
0=Unknown
1=Universal
1
03-017 SIP CommsPort-
Accs
Image Processing serial com-
munication port access - either
disabled or enabled
0=Disabled
1=Enabled
1
03-018 DC Install Phase Define platform current phase 0=Incomplete
1=Incomplete
2=Incomplete
3=Install Wizard
4=Incomplete
0
Table 4 NVM chain 5
05-001 DADH Feed Head
Count
Number of feeds 0 to 300000 0
05-002 CRU Days Number of days 0 to 65535 0
05-003 DADH Debounce
Time
Paper sensor debounce time 0 to 5000ms 300
05-005 DADH LE Hotline Modifies the delay between
reg sensor 'on' and DADH-
active 'on'
0=minus 8mm
160=plus 8mm
80
05-006 DADH TE Hotline Modifies the delay between
reg sensor 'on' and DADH-
active 'off'
0=minus 8mm
1=plus 8mm
80
Table 3 NVM chain 3
July 2005
05-007 Detect Paper Size 1 DADH sensor to detect sizes
for market regions.
0=A4,
1=8.5x13,
2=Auto market
region set
2
05-008 Detect Paper Size 2 DADH sensor to detect sizes
for market regions.
0=A5;
1=8.5x5.5,
2=auto market
region set
2
05-009 DADH Mag (copy
mode)
Half speed adj for >100%
copy
0 to 200
minus 10% to
plus 10%
94
05-010 DADH Mag (Fax
mode)
Half speed adj for >100% fax
mode
0 to 200
minus 10% to
plus 10%
100
05-012 DADH Duplex Motor
Speed
Adjustment of duplex motor
speed
0=normal
1=quiet mode
(reduced
speed)
0
Table 5 NVM chain 6
06-001 Light Level ROS light level 600 dpi and
1200 dpi
1500 to 6000
32/55=3600
65/75=2400
06-003 Ros Motor Time-out Time after which ROS motor
fault will be called
100 to 20000 5000
06-004 IQA Factor TRC adjustment used as a
factor applied to ROS light
50 to 200 100
Table 6 NVM chain 7
07-001 Feeder Module Type Defines feeder module type
67=2 internal trays + bypass
68=2 internal trays + bypass
+ HCF
67 or 68 67
Table 4 NVM chain 5
Table 7 NVM chain 8
08-001 Print Rate Number of prints per minute
(Controls the IOT print rate).
03-012 must be set to the
same speed.
0=35/38ppm,
1=45ppm,
2=55ppm.
3=65ppm,
4=75ppm,
5=32ppm,
6=53/38ppm,
7=unknown
8
08-002 Process speed Speed at which sheets move
through machine.
160 to 500 32/38=179
45/55=257
65/75=362
08-003 Machine Model Machine configuration setting 4 0
08-004 Machine Type Machine type setting 0=Unknown
1=Universal
0
08-045 Short Cycle Out
Time
IOT inactivity shutdown timer
(except ROS motor)
0 to 15 seconds 0
08-046 Long Cycle Out
Time
Inactivity cycle out timer. 0 to 180 sec-
onds
60
08-047 Abnormal Cycle
Out Time
Abnormal cycle out time 0 to 10 seconds 10
08-048 Top Edge Reg Tray
1 Simp
Tray 1 top edge registration
simplex
7300 to 7700 7510
2 Simp
simplex
7300 to 7700 7510
3 Simp
simplex
7300 to 7700 7522
4 Simp
simplex
7300 to 7700 7504
08-052 Top Edge Reg MSI
Simp
Bypass tray top edge registra-
tion simplex
7300 to 7700 7522
1 Dup
duplex
7300 to 7700 7510
2 Dup
duplex
7300 to 7700 7521
3 Dup
duplex
7300 to 7700 7533
4 Dup
duplex
7300 to 7700 7510
08-063 Top Edge Reg MSI
Dup
Bypass tray top edge registra-
tion duplex
7300 to 7700 7522
08-074 IOT LE Reg Simp IOT lead edge registration
simplex
0 to 250 141
08-075 IOT LE Reg Dup IOT Lead Edge Reg Dup 0 to 250 129
July 2005
08-107 Inv Mot Fwd To
Rev D1
IOT paper path timing, restart
sheet into duplex for mode 1
0 to 2500 32/38=1353
45/55=927
65/75=669
Rev D2
100 to 4000 32/38=3055
45/55=2130
65/75=1579
Rev D3
100 to 5000 32/38=3771
45/55=2631
65/75=2062
08-127 Res Sht To Le Dup
Lt Jam 3
Restart sheet to duplex jam
window to indicate LE of sheet
is late in mode 3
1579 to 2556 32/38=2400
45/55=1670
65/75=1190
08-128 Res Sht To Le Dup
Lt Jam 4
is late in mode 4
546 to 3000 32/38=2010
45/55=1340
65/75=960
08-148 Le Dup Snr To Clh
On Act
Duplex buckle timer mode 1 0 to 700 32/38=496
45/55=343
65/75=254
08-149 PSync To Reg Clut
On Dup
Duplex registration mode 1 160 to 300 32/38=314
45/55=219
65/75=154
08-152 Le Reg Snr To
Clutch On
Simplex buckle 100 to 900 32/38=630
45/55=440
65/75=313
08-153 PSync To Reg Clut
On Simp
Simplex registration 100 to 360 32/38=314
45/55=219
65/75=154
08-154 Te Reg Snr To
Clutch Off
Ensures sheet clear of reg
nips before turning clutch off
100 to 1200 32/38=860
45/55=610
65/75=380
08-159 Te Dup Snr To
Clutch Off
Time after paper reaches sen-
sor to switch clutch off
100 to 1100 32/38=860
45/55=610
65/75=380
08-160 Pitch Sync To Dup
Mot On
Time to switch duplex motor
on
10 to 60 30
08-162 Rel Sht Msi To Le
Reg Jam
Release sheet to reg to MSI
jam window to indicate LE of
sheet is late
200 to 1200 32/38=630
45/55=440
65/75=320
08-169 Simp Buckle
Transp'y
Simplex buckle for transpar-
ency stock
100 to 900 32/38=630
45/55=440
65/75=313
08-170 Simp Buckle
Enlopes
Simplex buckle for envelopes 100 to 900 32/38=630
45/55=440
65/75=313
Table 7 NVM chain 8
08-171 Simp Buckle
Labels
Simplex buckle for labels 100 to 900 32/38=600
45/55=420
65/75=298
08-172 Simp Buckle Card-
stock
Simplex buckle for card stock 100 to 900 32/38=630
45/55=440
65/75=313
08-177 Le Reg Snr To
Clutch Off
LE at reg sensor to clutch off 0 to 1000 32/38=530
45/55=350
65/75=220
08-178 Le Dup Snr To
Clutch Off
LE at dup sensor to clutch off 0 to 1000 32/38=380
45/55=240
65/75=160
08-179 Le Dup Snr To Cl
On Nom
LE at dup sensor to clutch on 0 to 1000 32/38=496
45/55=343
65/75=254
08-183 Tab Length Tab time 0 to 1000 32/38=70
45/55=50
65/75=40
Rev D4
IOT paper path timing. Restart
100 to 4000 32/38=3055
45/55=2130
65/75=1139
08-191 Simplex buckle for
MSI specific stan-
dard stock
Simplex buckle for MSI spe-
cific standard stock
100 to 900ms 32/38=630
45/55=440
65/75=313
08-200 Pitch Tick Simp
Mode 1
IOT paper path timing pitch
tick setting - Simplex mode 1
800 to 3500 32=1870
35/38=1560
45=1330
55=1090
65=920
75=800
Mode 2
1000 to 3500 32/38=2390
45/55=1670
65/75=1220
Mode 3
1000 to 3500 32/38=2760
45/55=1930
65/75=1430
Mode 4
1000 to 4000 32/38=3540
45/55=2500
65/75=1880
Mode 5
1000 to 3500 32/38=2600
45/55=1800
65/75=1040
Mode 6
1000 to 3500 32/38=2440
45/55=1700
65/75=1210
Table 7 NVM chain 8
July 2005
08-206 Pitch Tick Dup
Mode 1
tick setting - Duplex mode 1
600 to 3500 32/38=1560
45/55=1090
65/75=800
Mode 2
1000 to 3500 32/38=2390
45/55=1670
65/75=1220
Mode 3
1000 to 3500 32/38=2760
45/55=1930
65/75=1430
Mode 4
1000 to 3500 32/38=2390
45/55=1670
65/75=1220
Mode 5
600 to 3500 32/38=1560
45/55=1090
65/75=800
Mode 6
1000 to 3500 32/38=1560
45/75=1090
08-212 Restart Dup M5
Txpar
IOT transparency timing
restart sheets into duplex for
mode 5
0 to 2500ms 32/38=1331
45/55=927
65/75=669
08-213 Restart Dup M5
Envelope
IOT envelopes timing restart
sheets into duplex for mode 6
0 to 2500ms 32/38=1331
45/75=927
08-214 Nip Open Inv Mot
Rev M1
Time for nip to open after
inverter motor starts to
reverse (duplex for mode 1)
10 to 1000ms 32/38=570
45/55=400
65/75=290
Rev M2
10 to 1600ms 32/38=1300
45/55=900
65/75=640
Rev M3
10 to 2000ms 32/38=1300
45/55=900
65/75=640
Rev M4
10 to 1600ms 32/38=1300
45/55=900
65/75=640
Rev M5
transparencies
10 to 1000ms 32/38=570
45/55=400
65/75=290
Rev M6
envelopes
10 to 1000ms 32/38=570
45/55=400
65/75=380
08-220 Inv Mot Rev Dup
Mot M1
NVM inverter motor reverse to
duplex motor speed up for
mode 1
0 to 200ms 0
Table 7 NVM chain 8
Mot M2
mode 2
400 to 2000ms 32/38=1180
45/55=820
65/75=590
Mot M3
mode 3
800 to 2000ms 32/38=1760
45/55=1230
65/75=820
Mot M4
mode 4
400 to 2000ms 32/38=1180
45/55=820
65/75=590
Mot M5
mode 5 transparencies
0 to 200ms 0
Mot M6
0 to 200ms 0
08-226 Rst Dup Jam Win-
dow M1
window to indicate LE of the
sheet is late in mode 1
400 to 1500ms 32/38=1050
45/55=690
65/75=500
dow M2
sheet is late in mode 2
400 to 3000ms 32/38=2010
45/55=1340
65/75=960
dow M5
sheet is late in mode 5 trans-
parencies
400 to 3000ms 32/38=1050
45/55=690
65/75=500
dow M6
sheet is late in mode 6 enve-
lopes
546 to 1500ms 32/38=1050
45/75=690
08-230 Inv Mot Slow Down
M1
Inverter motor slow down for
mode 1
0 to 1000ms 32/55=100
65/75=150
M2
mode 2
0 to 1000ms 32/55=100
65/75=150
M3
mode 3
0 to 1000ms 32/55=100
65/75=150
M4
mode 4
0 to 1000ms 32/55=100
65/75=150
M5
0 to 1000ms 32/55=100
65/75=150
M6
mode 6 envelopes
0 to 1000ms 32/55=100
65/75=150
08-237 Trail Edge Thresh-
hold
Trail edge threshold 4 4
Table 7 NVM chain 8
July 2005
08-238 Inv Mot on Fwd Inverter motor on foreward 340 to 1000ms 32/38=860
45/55=600
65/75=430
08-239 Eng Nip To Mov
Sheet
Engages nips to move sheet
into inverter path
10 to 400ms 32/38=230
45/55=130
65/75=50
08-240 Inv Mot On Rev
Open
Inverter motor on reverse until
open
100 to 340ms 32/38=230
45/55=180
65/75=130
08-241 Inv Mot FwdStop
Rev
Time for inverter motor to go
forward, then stop, then to
reverse
36 to 80ms 32/55=50
65/75=57
08-242 Le Fsri Inv Mot On
dup
Time to turn on inverter motor
after LE leaves fuser (duplex)
300 to 1000ms 32/38=860
45/55=600
65/75=430
08-243 Le Nip Closed Dup Time between trail edge and
nip closed (duplex)
10 to 400ms 32/38=230
45/55=130
65/75=50
08-244 Exit Sen To Ofset
Mot On
Time from exit sensor to offset
tray motor on
0 to 3000ms 0
08-245 Post Fsr To Top
Tray Mot
Timing from post fuser to top
tray motor (forward)
100 to 2000ms 32/38=1520
45/55=1060
65/75=750
08-246 Top Tray Mot To
Post Fsr
Timing from top tray motor to
post fuser
100 to 1000ms 32/38=1880
45/55=1360
65/75=970
08-247 PFM Jam Window Release sheet registration
PFM jam window to indicate
LE of sheet is late
100 to 800ms 32/38=300
45/55=200
65/75=150
08-248 Clutch On Post Fsr
Jam
Clutch on to post fuser jam
is late
600 to 1850ms 32/38=1410
45/55=980
65/75=700
08-249 LE Post Fsr Exit
Jam Win
Lead edge post fuser to exit
jam window to indicate lead
edge of sheet is late
360 to 1100ms 32/38=920
45/55=680
65/75=490
08-250 TE Post Fsr Exit
Jam Win
Trail edge post fuser to exit
jam window to indicate trail
edge of sheet is late
600 to 1700ms 32/38=1490
45/55=1060
65/75=760
08-251 LE Post Fsr Exit
Late Win
Lead edge post fuser to top
exit jam windows to indicate
lead edge of sheet is late
1000 to
3300ms
32/38=3000
45/55=2000
65/75=1420
08-252 LE Post Fsr TE
Late Win
Lead edge post fuser to trail
edge post fuser jam window to
indicate trail edge of sheet is
late
0 to 500ms 32/38=270
45/55=170
65/75=130
Table 7 NVM chain 8
08-253 Le Iot Exit Iot Exit
Late
Lead edge IOT exit to trail
edge IOT exit jam window to
indicate lead / trail late
90 to 350ms 32/38=220
45/55=170
65/75=130
08-254 Le Top Exit TE Top
Exit Win
Lead edge top exit to trail
edge top exit jam window to
indicate lead edge / trail edge
late
90 to 350ms 32/38=220
45/55=170
65/75=130
08-255 LE late To Reg
Cltch On
Lead edge late to registration
after registration clutch on
0 to 1000ms 32/38=350
45/55=250
65/75=150
08-256 Reg Clutch On To
TE Late
Registration clutch on to trail
edge late to duplex sensor
0 to 1000ms 32/38=350
45/55=250
65/75=100
08-258 Tim After Sen
Ramp Dwn M1
Nominal time after hitting sen-
sor that speed ramps down for
mode 1
0 to 100ms 32/55=20
65/75=10
08-259 Slow Down Correct Temperature value to correct
slowdown
0 to 1000ms 32/38=36
45/55=17
65/75=15
08-260 Main Mot Run Up Maim motor run up time 0 to 4000ms 32/38=450
45/75=400
08-261 PR Mot Run Up Photoreceptor motor run up
time
0 to 4000ms 32/38=400
45/75=500
08-262 LE Sen To MSI Rel Time from lead edge sensor to
bypass tray (MSI) release
0 to 2000ms 32/38=505
45/55=364
65/75=258
08-263 LE Sen To PFM
Rel
Time from lead edge sensor to
PFM release
0 to 2000ms 32/38=177
45/55=122
65/75=86
08-264 TE Reg Fsr Exit Trail edge detection at regis-
tration, fuser + exit sensor =
paper size - NVM
0 to 1000ms 32/38=60
45/55=40
65/75=30
08-265 TE Duplex Trail edge detection duplex
sensor = paper size - NVM
0 to 1000ms 32/38=270
45/55=200
65/75=140
08-266 Pitch Win Rel Del Pitch window release delay 0 to 1000ms 32/38=440
45/55=320
65/75=227
08-267 Fin Finish Tim Finisher finish time 0 to 0 0
08-268 Fin Prep Tim Finisher preparation time 0 to 0ms 0
08-269 MSI Stray Sheet Jam timer for stray sheets
from the bypass tray (MSI)
0 to 1000ms 0
08-270 MSI Feed To PFM
Feed
Delay from the bypass tray
(MSI) feed to paper feed mod-
ule (PFM) feed to avoid jam
0 to 1000ms 32/38=370
45/55=250
65/75=172
Table 7 NVM chain 8
July 2005
08-271 Inv Mot Rev To
Stop Dup1
Inverter motor reverse to
inverter motor stop duplex 1
0 to 1000ms 32/38=628
45/55=343
65/75=420
Stop Dup 2
0 to 1000ms 32/55=188
65/75=110
Stop Dup 3
0 to 1000ms 32/38=410
45/75=414
Stop Dup 4
10 to 2000ms 32/55=188
65/75=110
Stop Dup 5
(transparencies)
0 to 1000ms 32/38=628
45/55=343
65/75=420
Stop Dup 6
(envelopes)
0 to 1000ms 32/38=628
45/55=343
65/75=420
08-277 Add To MSUI Pitch
Period
Addition to normal bypass
(MSI) pitch period
0 to 1000ms 32/55=0
65=170
75=290
08-278 Split Nip Control
S1
Split nip control for 1st sheet 0 to 350ms 210
08-279 Tim To Del Simp IOT time to deliver simplex 0 to 5000ms 32/38=2814
45/55=1961
65/75=1429
08-280 Tim To Del Invet IOT time to deliver: inter (sim-
plex + paper length)
0 to 5000ms 32/38=3880
45/55=2908
65/75=1684
08-281 Tim To Del Simp3 IOT time to deliver duplex
(simplex + 3 pitches)
0 to 5000ms 32/38=2814
45/55=1961
65/75=1429
08-282 Fsr 3min Warning
Temp
Temperature threshold level 10 to 50 deg C 40
Temp
Temp
08-285 Fsr Range Temperature range below
standby in which start print
can begin
0 to 0 deg C 32/38=30
45/55=10
65/75=28
08-286 Fsr Delta Temperature difference
between the 2 thermistors
0 to 0 deg C 45
08-287 Fsr TolrunA Temperature tolerance either
side of run target temperature.
Thermistor A
0 to 0 deg C 32/38=40
45/75=20
Table 7 NVM chain 8
08-288 Fsr Tolsave Temperature tolerance either
side of power save target tem-
perature
0 to 0 deg C 15
08-289 Fsr Step Temperature difference
between 2 consecutive read-
ings
0 to 0 deg C 3
08-290 Fsr TolrunB Temperature tolerance either
side of run target temperature.
Thermistor B
0 to 0 deg C 40
08-291 Fsr Max1 Temperature at which soft-
ware calls an over tempera-
ture fault
0 to 0 deg C 230
08-292 Fsr Max2 Temperature at which the
electronics shutdown the fuser
0 to 0 deg C 245
08-293 Fsr Tolstandby Temperature tolerance either
side of standby target temper-
ature
0 to 0 deg C 32/38=26
45/75=15
08-294 Fsr Apply Power
Time
Fuser apply power time 100 to 2000 ms 200
08-295 Fsr Bias To Run
Time
Fuser bias to marking mode
time
0 to 0 deg C 0
08-296 Trange Cooling Temperature offset above T
save at which control and fault
detection is enabled
0 to 0 deg C 10
Table 8 NVM chain 9
09-001 TC Lockout CSF NVM lockout for TC pro-
cess control failure. 1 = lock-
out
0=clear 1=lock-
out
0
09-002 Charge Scorotron Charge scorotron (wire).
Absolute value in NVM, real
value is negative
500 to 3000
microA
32/38=800
45/75=2050
09-003 Charge Grid Charge scorotron (grid).
Absolute value in NVM, real
value is negative
150 to 700 V 32/38=420
45/55=480
65/75=410
09-004 Chute Bias LE Chute bias print level.
Unsigned no. in NVM table
(displayed on GUI) to be con-
verted to signed no. over
range of -500 to +900 (Volts)
by subtraction of 500 from
table value
0 to 1400 V 500
09-005 Chute Bias Mid Chute bias inter document
level. Refer 09-004
0 to 900 V 500
Table 7 NVM chain 8
July 2005
09-006 Chute Bias TE Chute bias trail edge level.
Refer to 09-004
0 to 1400 V 500
09-007 Transfer LE Side 1 Side 1 transfer corotron LE 150 to 1000
microA
32/38=300
45/55=295
65/75=370
09-008 Transfer Mid Side
1
Side 1 transfer corotron intra-
document
150 to 100
microA
32/38=300
45/55=295
65/75=370
09-009 Transfer TE Side 1 Side 1 transfer corotron TE 150 to 1000
microA
32/38=300
45/55=295
65/75=370
09-010 Transfer LE Side 2 Side 2 transfer corotron LE 150 to 1000
microA
32/38=300
45/55=295
65/75=290
09-011 Transfer Mid Side
2
Side 2 transfer corotron intra-
document
150 to 1000
microA
32/38=300
45/55=295
65/75=290
09-012 Transfer TE Side 2 Side 2 transfer corotron TE 150 to 1000
microA
32/38=300
45/55=295
65/75=290
09-013 Detack AC Side 1 Side 1 detack corotron volt-
age
3000 to 5000 V 4200
09-014 Detack AC Side 2 Side 2 detack corotron volt-
age
3000 to 5000 V 4200
09-015 Detack LE Side 1 Side 1 detack corotron LE.
(and displayed on GUI) to be
converted to signed no. over
range of +20 to -200 (microA)
value in table
0 to 220 microA 32/38=150
45/75=130
09-016 Detack Mid Side 1 Side 1 detack corotron intra-
document. Unsigned no. in
NVM table (and displayed on
GUI) to be converted to
signed no. over range of +20
to -200 (microA) by subtrac-
tion of 200 from value in table
0 to 220 microA 32/38=165
45/75=160
09-017 Detack TE Side 1 Side 1 detack corotron TE.
value in table
0 to 220 microA 199
Table 8 NVM chain 9
09-018 Detack LE Side 2 Side 2 Detack Corotron LE.
value in table
0 to 220 microA 32/38=160
45/55=145
65/75=130
09-019 Detack Mid Side 2 Side 2 detack corotron intra-
document. Unsigned no. in
NVM table (and displayed on
signed no. over range of +20
to -200 (microA) by subtrac-
tion of 200 from value in table
0 to 220 microA 32/38=175
45/55=165
65/75=160
09-020 Detack TE Side 2 Side 2 detack corotron TE.
value in table
0 to 220 microA 199
09-021 Dev Bias Print
Level
Developer bias print level.
Absolute value in NVM real
value is negative
100 to 600 V 32/55=350
65/75=345
09-022 Dev Age Table Developer age table 0 or 1 0
09-023 T MMONCI Main motor on cycle In 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=770
45/55=540
65/75=380
09-024 T CSONCI Charge scorotron on cycle In 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=430
45/55=300
65/75=210
09-026 T PCELONCI Pre clean erase lamp on cycle
In
0 to 1000 ms 32/38=430
45/55=300
65/75=210
09-027 T DBONCI Developer bias on cycle In 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=310
45/55=210
65/75=100
09-029 T PCELONCI_alt Pre clean erase lamp on cycle
in alternative
0 to 1000 ms 0
09-031 T TCONRUN Transfer corotron on run 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=500
45/55=360
65/75=220
09-032 T DCONRUN Detack corotron on run 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=530
45/55=360
65/75=260
Table 8 NVM chain 9
July 2005
09-033 T CBONRUN Chute bias on run 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=540
45/55=380
65/75=270
09-036 T CBOFFRUN Chute bias off run 0 to 100 ms 32/38=60
45/55=40
65/75=30
09-037 T TCOFFRUN Detack corotron off run 0 to 1000 ms 32/38=60
45/55=40
65/75=50
09-039 T DCOFFRUN Detack corotron off run 0 to 500 ms 32/38=150
45/55=110
65/75=80
09-040 T TCLERUN Transfer corotron lead edge
switch
0 to 500 ms 32/38=140
45/55=100
65/75=70
09-041 T TCT ERUN Transfer corotron trail edge
switch
0 to 500 ms 32/38=90
45/55=60
65/75=40
09-042 T DCLERUN Detack corotron lead edge
switch
0 to 500 ms 32/38=140
45/55=100
65/75=70
09-043 T DCTERUN Detack corotron trail edge
switch
0 to 500 ms 32/38=130
45/55=90
65/75=60
09-044 T CBLERUN Chute bias lead edge switch 0 to 500 ms 32/38=140
45/55=100
65/75=70
09-045 T CBTERUN Chute bias trail edge switch 0 to 500 ms 32/38=140
45/55=100
65/75=70
09-048 T DBOFCO Developer bias off cycle out 0 to 500 ms 32/38=420
45/55=310
65/75=160
09-049 T MMOFCO Main motor off cycle out 0 to 500 ms 32/38=390
45/55=270
65/75=190
09-050 T PCELOFCO PR erase lamp off cycle out 0 to 1500 ms 32/38=1100
45/55=770
65/75=550
09-051 T PRMOFCO Photoreceptor motor off cycle
out
0 to 1500 ms 32/38=1130
45/55=790
65/75=560
09-052 T MMOFCO-alt Main motor off cycle out alter-
native
0 to 1500 ms 32/38=1120
45/55=780
65/75=550
Table 8 NVM chain 9
09-053 T DBOFCO-alt Developer bias off cycle out
alternative
0 to 1500 ms 32/38=1130
45/55=790
65/75=560
09-054 XeroCycleInMode Xerographic cycle in mode 0=normal
1=alternative
0
09-056 XeroTransCoro-
RunMode
Xerographic transfer corotron
run mode
0=normal
1=alternative
0
09-057 XeroDetackCoro-
Run
Xerographic detack corotron
run mode
0=normal
1=alternative
1
09-058 XeroChuteBias-
RunMode
Xerographic chute bias run
mode
0=normal
1=alternative
1
09-059 T DBOFCOFS Developer bias off cycle out
fast shutdown
0 to 1000 ms 32/38=420
45/55=310
65/75=220
09-060 XeroCycleOut-
Mode
Xerographic cycle out mode 0=normal
1=alternative
0
09-061 Detack ID Side 1 Detack corotron inter docu-
ment level, side 1
0 to 220 microA 200
09-062 Detack ID Side 2 Detack corotron inter docu-
ment level, side 1
0 to 220 microA 200
09-068 TC Setpoint Sets target TC for developer
process controls
0 to 500
(mVx10)
0
09-069 TCSensorCtrtVolt-
age
Sets TC sensor control volt-
age to adjust sensitivity
400 to 1200
(mVx10)
800
09-070 TCSetupCom-
pleted
TC setup completed 0 or 1 0
09-073 Last Pixel Count Cumulative Pixel Count over
the last TC control block (20
prints)
0 Read only 0
09-083 ReplenCart-
MotRun
Maximum continuous run
period
15 to 40 ms 30
09-087 Rep Cartridge
Empty
Toner (replenisher) cartridge
empty status
0 or 1 0
09-090 Waste Full Thresh-
old
Waste Full Print Count at
which Bottle Full status is
confirmed
1 to 1000 prints 100
09-093 Waste Shutdown
Limit
Maximum number of prints
allowed post waste full before
shutdown
0 to 10000
prints
32/45=0
55/75=1000
09-096 Developer Temp Actual developer temp as
measured by sensor
Degrees C. 0
09-097 Humidity% RH Actual machine humidity as
measured by sensor
%RH 0
Table 8 NVM chain 9
July 2005
09-098 Altitude Altitude adjustment in metres. 0 = zero to
749m
1 = 750 to
1499m
2 = 1500 to
2249m
3 = 2250 to
2999m
4 = 3000+m
0
09-100 Main Motor Delay
Flag
Enables or disables a delay to
the main motor and photore-
ceptor motor run up times by
adding 1150 to both of the
read NVM values for IOT
NVM
0=disabled
1=enabled
0
09-101 Ambient Temp Actual ambient temp as mea-
sured by sensor.
Degrees C 0
09-110 Replenisher
capacity
Replenisher capacity 1050 to 1787
grams
32/55=1188
65/75=1750
09-111 Repl. Delivery
Rate
Replenisher delivery rate 15 to 60 grams/
min
32/55=50
65/75=27
09-112 Cumulative Disp
Time
Total dispense time 0 minutes 0
09-114 Rep Lev Snr Fault Flag to indicate replenisher
sensor failure. boolean
0=good 1=fault 0
09-115 TC Sensor Fault TC sensor fault 0=good 1=fault 0
09-116 Paper path fans
mode
Paper path cooling mode 0=disabled
1=enabled
32/55=0
65/75=1
09-117 Scorotron On
Ramp Up
Charge scorotron ON cycle in
ramp up
0 to 1000 32/55=0
65/75=100
09-118 Dev bias On Ramp
Up
Developer bias ON cycle in
ramp up
0 to 1000 32/55=0
65/75=160
09-119 GridV Off Ramp
Dwn
Charge scorotron grid voltage
OFF cycle out ramp down
0 to 1000 32/55=0
65/75=120
09-120 Ozone max life Stores the maximum prints to
make with the current ozone
filter
0 to
4294967295
350k
09-121 Man Cleaning
Interval
Charge Scorotron Manual
Cleaning Interval. Frequency
in K sheets for when a manual
scorotron cleaning request is
displayed
2 to 50 25k
Table 8 NVM chain 9
09-122 Auto Cleaning
Interval
Charge Scorotron Auto
Cleaning Interval. Frequency
in K sheets for when a manual
scorotron cleaning request is
displayed
2 to 50 20k
09-123 Num Images
Delivered
Number of images delivered 0 to
4294967295
0
09-124 Inactivity Limit Machine inactivity limit 120 to 4320 300
09-125 Dev Bias Off
Ramp Dwn
Developer bias OFF cycle out
ramp down
0 to 1000 32/55=0
65/75=160
09-126 Dev Bias Off
Ramp Dwn Alt
Developer bias OFF cycle out
ramp down alternative
0 to 1000 32/55=0
65/75=100
09-127 Dev Bias Off FS
Ramp Dwn Alt
Developer bias OFF fast shut-
down cycle out ramp down
0 to 1000 32/55=0
65/75=100
09-128 PC From Flash Or
Ram
For development only. Alters
process control factors source
from either flash or NVM
0 to 1 0
09-129 Disp Mot Min Run Dispense motor minimum run
time for toner dispense
100 to 1000 200
09-130 Disp Mot Ramp Up Dispense motor ramp up time 10 to 2000 30
09-131 Disp Mot Run On Dispense motor run on time 10 to 2000 32/55=0
65/75=190
09-132 Nh Vac Fan Off To
Off Tme
Nohad vacuum fan on time 0 to 100 32/38=0
45/75=43
09-133 Nh Vac Fan Off To
On Tme
Nohad vacuum fan off time 0 to 100 32/38=42
45/75=29
09-267 Humidity Sensor
Fault
Humidity sensor fault 0=good 1=fault 0
09-268 Dev Temp Sensor
Fault
Developer temperature sen-
sor fault
0=good 1=fault 0
09-269 AmbTempSensor-
Fault
Ambient temperature sensor
fault
0=good 1=fault 0
09-271 Developer age Developer material age 0 to
2147483647
pages
0
09-273 OCT Full Filter
Page Count
OCT 90% full filter 0 to 50 pages 30
09-274 Chute Bias inter
doc
Chute bias inter document
level. Unsigned no. in NVM
table (displayed on GUI) to be
range of -500 to +900 (Volts)
table value
0 to 1400V 0
Table 8 NVM chain 9
July 2005
09-275 TC Setup Target
Voltage
Toner concentration setup tar-
get voltage
0 to 500
(mVx10)
185
09-276 TC lockout high CSF NVM lockout for TC pro-
cess control. Failure = high.
0=clear 1=lock-
out
0
09-277 Int Man Clean
Enable
Interim manual charge
scorotron cleaning ennoble-
ment flag
0=disabled
1=enabled
1
09-278 Auto Clean Enable Auto charge scorotron clean-
ing ennoblement flag
0=disabled
1=enabled
32/38=0
45/75=1
09-279 Charg Clean Cout
Enable
Charge cleaner count enable 0=disabled
1=enabled
0
09-280 Inactivity Limit IOT Machine inactivity limit held
on the IOT PWB
120 to 4320 300
Table 9 NVM chain 10
10-028 Standby Temp Target temperature during
standby mode
10 to 230
degrees C
32/38=190
45/55=195
65/75=208
10-029 Run Temp Target temperature during
run mode
100 to 230
degrees C
32/38=185
45/55=195
65/75=203
10-030 Low Power Temp Target temp during Power
save mode
50 to 150
degrees C
32/38=85
45/55=95
65/75=135
10-042 101-120 mm offset Offset temperature required
on thermistor B for paper
width. Unsigned no. in NVM
range of -10 to +10 by sub-
traction of 10 from table value
0 to 20
degrees C
10
0 to 20
degrees C
10
0 to 20
degrees C
10
Table 8 NVM chain 9
0 to 20
degrees C
10
0 to 20
degrees c
10
0 to 20
degrees C
10
0 to 20
degrees C
10
0 to 20
degrees C
10
0 to 20
degrees C
10
July 2005
0 to 20
degrees C
10
10-053 80 gms Offset Media type offset for fuser roll
temperature. Unsigned no. in
NVM table (displayed on
signed no. over range of -10
to +10 by subtraction of 10
from table value
0 to 30
degrees C
10
10-058 Transparency Off-
set
Media type offset for fuser roll
from table value
0 to 30
degrees C
32/55=10
65/75=0
10-059 Card stock offset Media type offset for fuser roll
from table value
0 to 25
degrees C
15
10-060 Envelopes Offset Media type offset for fuser roll
from table value
0 to 30
degrees C
32/55=15
65/75=10
10-061 Labels Offset Media type offset for fuser roll
from table value
0 to 30
degrees C
32/55=15
65/75=10
10-063 NVM Trange Cool-
ing
Total fuser web count Cycles 0
10-064 Transparency
delay
Media type time delay for
fuser roll temperature
0 to 8 seconds 0
10-065 Cardstock delay Media type time delay for
0 to 8 seconds 4
10-066 Envelopes delay Media type time delay for
0 to 8 seconds 4
10-067 Labels delay Media type time delay for
0 to 8 seconds 4
10-068 Tab stock delay Media type time delay for
0 to 8 seconds 4
10-069 Cold Start Offset Fuser cold start offset profile 0 to 3 0
10-070 Cold Roll Offset Fuser cold roll offset profile 0 to 8 32/38=1
45/55=6
65/75=8
10-102 TePFsToInvMot-
OffSimp
Inverter motor off stop posi-
tion (simplex)
100 to 800 ms 32/38=520
45/55=350
65/75=224
10-122 TePFsrToInvMot-
OffDup
Time to turn off inverter motor
after TE leaves fuser (duplex)
300 to 1200
ms
32/38=740
45/55=510
65/75=344
July 2005
6-71 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131b
dC131b NVM Tables Chain 12 to 28
General
1. Refer to the tables that follow for NVM parameters chain 12 to 28:
12-001 Finisher Module
Type
Defines finisher module
types
65=OCT,
66=SCT,
110=LCSS2K,
120=LCSS1K,
130=HCSS,
140=Not Used
150=Not Used
160=Not Used
170=Booklet-
Maker,
100=NoFin-
isher
65
12-002 OCTFullFilter OCT 90% full filter 0 to 5000 ms 2500
12-003 BookMkrCompile-
Offset
Used to adjust the compiler
position of the booklet
maker back stop.
0 to 200
0.1137mm/step
100
12-004 BookMkrStapleOff-
set
Used to align the staple to
the fold.
0 to 200
0.1137mm/step
100
12-005 BookMkrFold Off-
set
Used to centre the fold and
the staple relative to the
lead edge.
0 to 200
0.1137mm/step
100
12-006 BookMkrTampRdy-
Offset
Used to adjust the booklet
maker tamping ready posi-
tion.
0 to 200
0.1137mm/step
100
12-007 PFM Wait Point Adj Paper feed module wait
point adjustment
0 to 20 5
12-008 PFM Relese Adj Paper feed module release
adjustment
0 to 20 15
12-050 FinisherSoftCyc-
Time
Time out for soft cycling of
finisher to time seconds
0 to 60 sec-
onds
32/38=40
45=35
55/75=30
14-001 DADH Centre Reg DADH CVT centre registration 2200 to 3850
pixels
3560
14-002 DADH LE Reg DADH lead edge registration 0 to 150 scan
lines
70
14-003 Platen Top Edge
Reg
Platen top edge registration 6900 to 7500
pixels
32/55=7125
65/75=7250
14-004 Platen Lead Edge
Reg
Platen lead edge registration 0 to 150 scan
lines
70
14-005 Periodic Cal time Periodic calibration time 1 to 240ms 60
14-006 Black Only Cal
Time
Black only calibration time 1 to 240 ms 10
14-007 First Cal Time When to do the first warm cali-
bration after cold start
5 to 30 min-
utes
5
14-008 Wait Time Full Cal Time to wait for full calibration 0 to 255 ms 15
14-010 Platen Timeout
Time2
Platen time-out time 2 0 to 120 ms 90
14-011 Platen Sensor
Region
Contains the market region for
which the platen size sensors
are to be programmed
0 to 10 0
14-012 Scanner CVT posi-
tion
Adjusts position of scan car-
riage at the CVT position
4868 to 4898
0.1mm incre-
ments
32/55=4988
65/75=4878
14-013 Scanner Doc Size
Pos
Adjusts position of scan car-
riage at the document size
position
0 to 5000
0.1mm incre-
ments
32/55=700
65/75=500
14-014 Scanner LE Hotline Scanner lead edge active hot
line
200 to 500
0.1mm incre-
ments
32/55=350
65/75=230
14-025 Scan CCD Gain
Setpt
To adjust pixel gain set point
during scanner CCD calibra-
tion
150 to 255
increments of
1 bit
214
14-026 Scan CCD Offset
Pnt
To adjust offset point during
scanner CCD calibration
0 to 20 Incre-
ments of 1 bit
0
14-027 Scanner Mag Adj Adjust platen scan speed in
slow scan direction to com-
pensate for magnification
errors
50 to 150 100
15-005 ScannerFSResolu-
tion
To provide configuration sup-
port for scanners with Fast
Scan resolutions of 400 dpi and
600 dpi
400 or 600 600
July 2005
15-006 Scanner Direction To provide configuration sup-
port for scanners with different
Fast Scan direction
0=reverse
1=forward
1
15-007 CVT scanning
image gain adjust-
ment
Percentage increase with
respect to document glass
scanning gain
0 to 20% 5
Table 4 NVM chain 17 (image disk drive not used)
17-001 Disk Mode Disk present. 1=enabled
0=disabled
0
17-002 Disk spin up
delay
Time before image disk
receives power
0 to 30 seconds 10
19-001 Megs of Mem-
ory
Amount of memory installed 0 to 65535M 16
19-002 Resource%
Reported
Resource percentage reported 0 to 99% 10
19-003 Use Partial
Blocks
Used partial blocks 0 or 1 1
19-004 Mark mode
EPC full
Marking mode when EPC full 0 or 3 0
19-005 Memory on Tar-
get
Memory on target 0 to 65535 32
19-006 Image Alloc
Ratio
Nominal compression ratio 1 to 50% 30
19-007 Print Img Limit Maximum number of network
controller images that can be in
EPC at any given time
35 to 5000 3501
19-008 EPC Setting Governs the setting of the EPC
low and intermediate thresh-
olds.
1=Optimised for
smaller sheets,
A4/8.5x11. EPC
less than 256Mb.
2=Intermediate
setting, optimized
for medium size
sheet
3=Optimised for
large sheet, A3/
11x17. EPC
greater than
256Mb
1
19-009 Ncomp EPC
Simp Img No
Number of images inputted
before a non-compiled simplex
print job is released for marking
Range 1 to 50 2
19-010 Ncomp EPC
Dup Img No
before a non-compiled duplex
Range 1 to 50 4
19-011 Comp EPC
Simp Img No
before a compiled simplex
Range 1 to 50 2
19-012 Comp EPC Dup
Img No
before a compiled duplex print
job is released for marking
Range 1 to 50 4
20-200 FaxLine1Config Line 1 configuration setting 0 = send and receive. 1 =
send only. 2 = receive
only
0
20-201 FaxLine2Config Line 2 configuration setting 0 = send and receive. 1 =
send only. 2 = receive
only
0
20-204 FaxLine1TypeDe
fault
Line type configuration set-
ting
0 = analogue line. 1 =
ISDN line. 2 = not con-
figured
0
20-205 FaxLine2TypeDe
fault
Line type configuration set-
ting
0 = analogue line, 1 =
ISDN line, 2 = not config-
ured
0
20-209 LinePriority Priority of fax lines 1 = line 1 has priority. 2
= line 2 has priority
1
20-210 FaxPauseTime-
Default
Pause time Range = 0 to 255 sec-
onds
3
July 2005
20-211 FaxAutore-dial-
Default
Number of times to retry
(not connected)
Range = 0 to 14 10
20-212 FaxAutore-dial-
TimeDef
Time between each re-dial Range = 1 to 25 minutes 3
20-213 FaxAutoResend-
Default
Number of times to re-dial
(connected)
Range = 0 to 5 3
20-214 FxAutoResend-
Policy
Sends a cover sheet and
extra pages if interrupted
0 = without cover page
and resent failed pages.
1 = with cover page and
resent failed page. 2 =
without cover page and
resent all pages. 3 = with
cover page and resent all
pages.
0
20-216 FaxAudioLineM-
onEnbld
Listens to line traffic on
sending
0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0
20-217 FaxAudio-
LineMonDel
Determines when to stop lis-
tening to the line traffic
Range = 0 to 25 sec-
onds.
5
20-218 FaxAudio-
LineMonVol
Volume of the line monitor 0 = high 1 = medium 2
= low
1
20-219 Faxreceivembox-
DocDef
Receive mailbox policy 0 = delete on print. 1 =
keep for 1 to 72 hours. 2
= keep forever
0
20-220 Fxreceivembox-
DocTime
Time to keep if the policy is
a pre set time
Range = 1 to 72 hours 72
20-221 FaxAnswerMode Answer mode 0 = auto 1 = manual 0
20-222 FaxAutoAnswer-
Delay
When to answer the call if
automatic.
Range = 0 to 15 seconds 0
20-223 FaxRecvPprAu-
toEnbld
Determines what to declare
for paper sizes
0 = auto 1 = manual 0
20-224 FaxSendOptions Determines what size of
image to send
0 = reduce to fit 1 = split
pages
0
20-225 FaxRecvPage-
Margin
determines if removing scan
lines is allowable
20-226 TransmnRepor-
tApp
Determines if a reduced
image is shown
0 = reduced image 1 =
no Image
0
20-227 TransRptBehav-
iour
Determines when a trans-
mission report is printed
0 = always print 1 = print
on error 2 = off
1
20-228 FaxRingVolume Ring volume 0 = high 1 = medium 2 =
low
1
20-229 FaxRingVol-
umeEnabled
Ring volume enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 1
20-230 FaxLine1DialTyp
eDef
Dial type configuration 0 = tone 1 = pulse 0
20-231 FaxLine2DialTyp
eDef
Dial type configuration 0 = tone 1 = pulse 0
20-235 FaxDateField-
Format
Date Format 0 = MM/DD/YY 1 = DD/
MM/YY. 2 = YY/MM/DD
0
20-236 FaxTimeField-
Format
Time format 0 = 12 hour 1 = 24 hour 1
20-237 FaxXmitHeader-
TextEnabled
Transmit header Text
enabled
20-240 FaxMatch-
JunkEnabled
Enable junk fax prevention 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0
20-241 FaxMatchJunk-
Type
Type of screen for junk fax 0 = match dial directory.
1 = match junk directory
0
20-242 FaxPollEnabled Polling enabled 0 = disabled 1 = unse-
cure. 2 = dial and poll
directory. 3 = poll direc-
tory
0
20-243 FaxPollPolicyDef Polled document policy 0 = delete on poll 1 =
keep for 1 to 72 hours 2
= keep forever
0
20-244 FaxPollPolicy-
Time
Time to keep if the policy is
a pre set time
Range = 1 to 72 hours 72
20-246 FaxImageOver-
writeEnb
Overwrite image 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0
20-247 FaxImgOver-
writePat
Default pattern 0 = alternate zeros and
ones starting with one 1
= User specified pattern
0
20-248 FaxReportPolicy-
Def
Report policy 0 = print. 1 = follow
secure policy. 2 = store
in mailbox
0
20-249 FaxActivityRe-
portDef
Activity report default 0 = off 1 = auto print 1
20-252 FaxBroadc-
stRepDef
Broadcast and multi poll
report default and remote
broadcast
0 = always print. 1 = print
on error. 2 = off
1
July 2005
20-254 FaxCountry Fax country
NOTE: In this table the
NVM locations are default
values for the UK.
Refer to dC131d for the
NVM locations and values
that are unique to each
country.
0 = USA, 1 = Canada, 2
= Brazil, 3 = Mexico, 4 =
Argentina, 5 = Chile, 6 =
UK, 7 = Switzerland, 8 =
Norway, 9 = Denmark,
10 = Ireland, 11 = Aus-
tria, 12 = Finland, 13 =
France, 14 = Germany,
15 = Sweden, 16 = Bel-
gium, 17 = Nether-
lands,18 = Italy, 19 =
Portugal, 20 = Greece,
21 = Spain, 22 = Russia,
23 = Czech Republic, 24
= Poland, 25 = Hungary,
26 = Yugoslavia, 27 =
Romania, 29 = Turkey,
33 = South Africa, 35 =
India, 37 = Iceland, 38 =
Luxembourg, 39 = Bul-
garia, 41 = Australia
6
20-255 FaxLanguage Report language 0 = French Canadian, 1
= English, 2 = Danish, 3
= Swedish, 4 = Interna-
tional Spanish, 5 = Ger-
man, 6 = Italian, 7 = US
English, 8 = Dutch, 9 =
Portuguese, 10 = Norwe-
gian, 11 = Finnish, 12 =
French, 13 = Brazilian,
14 = Greek, 15 = Czech,
16 = Polish, 17 = Hun-
garian, 18 = Romanian,
19 = Turkish, 20 = Rus-
sian, 21 = Simplified Chi-
nese
1
20-256 SecReceiveEn-
abled
Determine whether Secure
Receive is on or off
0 = secure receive is off
1 = secure receive is on
0
20-257 CompressTypeLi
ne1TX
T30 maximum compres-
sion-TX line 1
2 = MH 3 = MR 4 = MMR 4
ne2TX
T30 maximum compression
TX line 2
2 = MH 3 = MR 4 = MMR 4
ne1RX
RX line 1
2 = MH 3 = MR 4 = MMR 4
ne2RX
RX line 2
2 = MH 3 = MR 4 = MMR 4
20-263 FaxISDNASR ISDN ASR ISDN answer specified
number range 1 or 2
numbers
2
20-264 FaxISDNPP ISDN PP 0 = operate point to mul-
tipoint protocol. 1 = oper-
ate point to point protocol
1
20-265 FaxISDNOverla-
pRec
ISDN overlap receiving 0 = operate en-block
receiving 1 = operate
overlap receiving
0
20-266 FaxISDNLine-
Type
ISDN line type 0 = National ISDN-1
1 = Northan Telecom
(DMS-100)
2 = AT and T Custom
(5ESS) 3 = Euro ISDN
3 = Euro ISDN
0
20-267 CallHunting Call hunting 0 = disabled 1 = enable 0
20-269 TeiSetting TEI setting 0 to 63 (user entered
data)
0
20-270 TeiSettingType TEI type 0 = automatic 1 = man-
ual
0
20-271 OhmTermination Ohmic termination 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0
20-273 G4Enabled G4 enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0
20-274 CardResetStop Reset/stop card on recover-
able fault
0 = reset 1 = stop 0
20-275 LoadJobsAtStart Load jobs at start up 0 = do not load jobs, 1 =
load jobs
1
20-276 LoadDirectorie-
sAtStart
Load directories at start up 0 = do not load directo-
ries, 1 = load directories
1
20-277 LoadMailboxe-
sAtStart
load mailboxes at start up 0 = do not load mail
boxes. 1 = load mail-
boxes
1
20-278 LastUserJobID Last allocated user job ID Sets the last allocated
user job ID
999
20-279 LastRecurringJo-
bID
Last allocated recurring job
ID
Sets the last allocated
recurring job ID
5199
20-280 CompletedJob-
sCount
Completed jobs count Sets the completed jobs
count for automatic activ-
ity report generation
0
20-281 Line1CurrentDet
ection
Line current detection line 1 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 1
20-282 Line2CurrentDet
ection
Line current detection line 2 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 1
20-283 T30MaxResL1T
X
T30 maximum resolution
line 1 TX
2 = 200x100, 3 =
200x200, 5 = 300x300, 7
= 400x400, 8 = 600x600
8
July 2005
20-284 T30MaxResL2T
X
line 2 TX
2 = 200x100, 3 =
200x200, 5 = 300x300, 7
= 400x400, 8 = 600x600
8
20-285 T30MaxResL1R
X
line 1 RX
2 = 200x100, 3 =
200x200, 5 = 300x300, 7
= 400x400, 8 = 600x600
8
20-286 T30MaxResL2R
X
line 2 RX
2 = 200x100, 3 =
200x200, 5 = 300x300, 7
= 400x400, 8 = 600x600
8
20-287 T30MaxSpeedL1
TX
T30 maximum speed line 1
TX
3 = 33600, 4 = 31200, 5
= 28800, 6 = 26400, 7 =
24000, 8 = 21600, 9 =
19200, 10 = 16800, 11=
14400, 12 = 12000, 13 =
9600, 14 = 7200, 15 =
4800, 16 = 2400
3
TX
TX
3 = 33600, 4 = 31200, 5
= 28800, 6 = 26400, 7 =
24000, 8 = 21600, 9 =
19200, 10 = 16800, 11=
14400, 12 = 12000, 13 =
9600, 14 = 7200, 15 =
4800, 16 = 2400
3
RX
RX
3 = 33600, 4 = 31200, 5
= 28800, 6 = 26400, 7 =
24000, 8 = 21600, 9 =
19200, 10 = 16800, 11=
14400, 12 = 12000, 13 =
9600, 14 = 7200, 15 =
4800, 16 = 2400
3
RX
RX
3 = 33600, 4 = 31200, 5
= 28800, 6 = 26400, 7 =
24000, 8 = 21600, 9 =
19200, 10 = 16800, 11=
14400, 12 = 12000, 13 =
9600, 14 = 7200, 15 =
4800, 16 = 2400
3
20-291 T30PrefResUnits
L1TX
T30 preferred resolution
units line 1 TX
0 = any 1 = metric 2 =
inch
0
L2TX
units line 2 TX
inch
0
L1RX
units line 1 RX
inch
0
L2RX
units line 2 RX
inch
0
20-295 T30MinScanLine
TimeL1
T30 minimum scan line time
line 1
0 = 0ms/0ms, 1 = 5ms/
5ms, 2 = 10ms/5ms, 3 =
10ms/10ms, 4 = 20ms/
10ms, 5 = 20ms/20-ms,
6 = 40ms/20ms, 7 =
40ms/40ms
0
20-296 T30MinScanLine
TimeL2
T30 minimum scan line time
line 2
0 = 0ms/0ms, 1 = 5ms/
5ms, 2 = 10ms/5ms, 3 =
10ms/10ms, 4 = 20ms/
10ms, 5 = 20ms/20-ms,
6 = 40ms/20ms, 7 =
40ms/40ms
0
20-297 T30ECMEnabled
L1TX
T30 ECM enabled/disabled
line 1 TX
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled 1
L2TX
line 2 TX
L1RX
line 1 RX
L2RX
line 2 RX
20-301 FaxPwrSavLock-
Ahead
Look ahead period to pend-
ing fax job which will prohibit
entry into sleep.
Range = 0 to 120 min-
utes
1
20-302 ExtendedRetry-
Policy
Determine if a confirmed
transmission report is
printed if MCF not received
for last page sent.
0 = Strict retry policy (all
MCF required)
1 = Optional ignore final
missing MCF
1
20-399 SaveCom-
pressedData
Temporary NVM to capture
the data for received page
to RAM disk and copy to
NVM if error occurs
0 = Disabled 0
20-430 Busy1FilterStage
1A1
Busy 1 filter stage 1 A1 Range = 1 to 65535 1245
1A2
1A3
1B1
Busy 1 filter stage 1 B1 Range = 1 to 65535 29034
1B2
2A1
2A2
July 2005
2A3
2B1
2B2
20-440 Busy1LowPassF
eedback
Busy 1 low pass feedback Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-441 FaxBusy1LowPa
ssGain
Busy 1 low pass gain Range = 1 to 65535 735
20-442 Busy1UpperThre
shold
Busy 1 upper threshold Range = 1 to 65535 1264
20-443 Busy1LowerThre
shold
Busy 1 lower threshold Range = 1 to 65535 1223
1A1
1A2
1A3
1B1
1B2
2A1
2A2
20-451 FaxBsy2FilterStg
e2A3
20-452 FaxBsy2FilterStg
e2B1
2B2
20-454 Busy2LowPassF
eedback
Busy 2 low pass feedback Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-455 FaxBusy2LowPa
ssGain
Busy 2 low pass gain Range = 1 to 65535 735
20-456 Busy2UpperThre
shold
Busy 2 upper threshold Range = 1 to 65535 10752
20-457 Busy2LowerThre
shold
Busy 2 lower threshold Range = 1 to 65535 7168
20-458 Busy1DetectAlgo
rithm
Busy 1 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-459 Busy1NumCellP
attern
Busy 1 number cell pattern Number of patterns to
describe the sequence
Range = 0 to 3
2
20-460 Busy1TmoutRes
etDetct
Busy 1 time out reset detec-
tor
Range = 1 to 15000 ms 100
20-461 FaxBusy1Make
Min1
Busy 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
20-462
FaxBusy1Make
Max1
Busy 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 480
20-463 FaxBusy1MakeH
ole1
Busy 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
20-464 FaxBusy1Break
Min1
Busy 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
Max1
Busy 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 480
Hole1
Busy 1 break hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 0
20-467 FaxBusy1IdxNex
tCell1
Busy 1 idx next cell 1 Index of next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
1
20-468 Busy1IdxRestart
Cell1
Busy 1 idx restart cell 1 Index to restart at.
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-469 Busy1FlagDetct
Perfd1
Busy 1 flag detection per-
formed 1
Is this the last detection
pattern? Range = 0 to 1
0
20-470 FaxBusy1Make
Min2
20-471 FaxBusy1Make
Max2
ole2
Min2
Max2
Hole2
tCell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-478 Busy1FlgDetect
Perfd2
formed 2
1
20-479 FaxBusy1Make
Min3
July 2005
20-480 FaxBusy1Make
Max3
ole3
Min3
Max3
Hole3
tCell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Perfd3
formed 3
0
20-488 Busy2DetectAlgo
rithm
Busy 2 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-489 Busy2NumCellP
attern
Busy 2 number cell pattern number of patterns to
describe the sequence.
Range = 0 to 3
2
20-490 Busy2TmoutRes
etDetct
Busy 2 time out reset detec-
tor
Range = 1 to 15000 ms 100
20-491 FaxBusy2Make
Min1
20-492 FaxBusy2Make
Max1
ole1
Min1
Max1
Hole1
tCell1
Range = 0 to 2
1
Cell1
Range = 0 to 2
0
Perfd1
formed 1
0
20-500 FaxBusy2Make
Min2
20-501 FaxBusy2Make
Max2
ole2
Min2
Max2
Hole2
tCell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Perfd2
formed 2
0
20-509 FaxBusy2Make
Min3
20-510 FaxBusy2Make
Max3
ole3
Min3
Max3
Hole3
tCell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Perfd3
formed 3
0
20-518 Congt1FilterStag
e1A1
Congest 1 Filter stage 1 A1 Range = 1 to 65535 1245
e1A2
e1A3
e1B1
Congest 1 Filter stage 1 B1 Range = 1 to 65535 29034
e1B2
July 2005
e2A1
e2A2
e2A3
e2B1
e2B2
20-528 Congt1LwPassF
eedback
Congest 1 Low Pass Feed-
back
Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-529 Congest1LowPa
ssGain
Congest 1 Low Pass Gain Range = 1 to 65535 735
20-530 Congt1UpperThr
eshold
Congest 1 Upper Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 1264
20-531 Congt1LowerThr
eshold
Congest 1 Lower Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 1223
20-532 Congt1DetctAlgo
rithm
Congest 1 detection algo-
rithm
Range = 32 to 33 32
20-533 Congt1NumCell
Pattern
Congest 1 number cell pat-
tern
Number of patterns to
Range = 0 to 3
2
20-534 Congt1TmoutRs
etDetct
Congest 1 time out reset
detector
Range = 1 to 15000 ms 100
20-535 FaxCongest1Ma
keMin1
Congest 1 make min 1 Range = 1 to 10000 ms 300
keMax1
Congest 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 500
keHole1
Congest 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
20-538 FaxCongest1Bre
akMin1
Congest 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 280
akMax1
Congest 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 440
20-540 FaxCongst1Brea
kHole1
Congest 1 break hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 0
20-541 Congest1IdxNext
Cell1
Congest 1 idx next cell 1 Index of next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
1
20-542 Congt1IdxRstart
Cell1
Congest 1 idx restart cell 1 Index to restart at.
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-543 Congt1FlgDetctP
erfd1
Congest 1 flag detection
performed 1
0
keMin2
keMax2
keHole2
akMin2
akMax2
kHole2
Cell2
Congest 1 idx next cell 2 Index of next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd2
performed 2
1
keMin3
keMax3
keHole3
akMin3
akMax3
kHole3
Cell3
Congest 1 idx next cell 3 Index of next pattern
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd3
performed 3
0
20-562 FaxCED1FiltrSta
ge1A1
CED 1 Filter stage 1 A1 Range = 1 to 65535 489
ge1A2
ge1A3
ge1B1
CED 1 Filter stage 1 B1 Range = 1 to 65535 57167
July 2005
ge1B2
ge2A1
ge2A2
ge2A3
ge2B1
ge2B2
20-572 FaxCED1LwPas
sFeedbck
CED 1 Low Pass Feedback Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-573 FaxCED1LowPa
ssGain
CED 1 Low Pass Gain Range = 1 to 65535 735
20-574 FaxCED1UpprTh
reshold
CED 1 Upper Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 10752
20-575 FaxCED1LowrTh
reshold
CED 1 Lower Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 7168
20-576 CED1DetectAlgo
rithm
CED 1 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-577 CED1NumCellP
attern
CED 1 number cell pattern Number of patterns to
Range 0 to 3
1
20-578 CED1TmoutRes
etDetect
CED 1 time out reset detec-
tor
Range = 1 to 15000 ms 100
20-579 FaxCED1MakeM
in1
CED 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
20-580 FaxCED1MakeM
ax1
CED 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
20-581 FaxCED1MakeH
ole1
CED 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
20-582 FaxCED1Break
Min1
CED 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 0
20-583 FaxCED1Break
Max1
CED 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 0
20-584 FaxCED1BreakH
ole1
CED 1 break hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 0
20-585 FaxCED1IdxNex
tCell1
CED 1 idx next cell 1 Index of next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
255
20-586 CED1IdxRestart
Cell1
CED 1 idx restart cell 1 Index to restart at.
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-587 CED1FlagDetect
Perfd1
CED 1 flag detection per-
formed 1
1
20-588 FaxCED1MakeM
in2
20-589 FaxCED1MakeM
ax2
20-590 FaxCED1MakeH
ole2
20-591 FaxCED1Break
Min2
20-592 FaxCED1Break
Max2
ole2
tCell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Perfd2
formed 2
0
20-597 FaxCED1MakeM
in3
20-598 FaxCED1MakeM
ax3
20-599 FaxCED1MakeH
ole3
20-600 FaxCED1Break
Min3
20-601 FaxCED1Break
Max3
ole3
tCell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Perfd3
formed 3
0
20-606 IntDtone1FltrStg
e1A1
International Dtone 1 Filter
stage 1 A1
Range = 1 to 65535 714
e1A2
stage 1 A2
Range = 1 to 65535 64822
e1A3
stage 1 A3
Range = 1 to 65535 0
July 2005
e1B1
stage 1 B1
Range = 1 to 65535 29251
e1B2
stage 1 B2
Range = 1 to 65535 50750
e2A1
stage 2 A1
Range = 1 to 65535 714
20-612 Dtone1FilterStag
e2A2
stage 2 A2
Range = 1 to 65535 1427
e2A3
stage 2 A3
Range = 1 to 65535 714
e2B1
stage 2 B1
Range = 1 to 65535 29251
e2B2
stage 2 B2
Range = 1 to 65535 50750
20-616 IntDtone1LwPss
Fdback
International Dtone 1 Low
Pass Feedback
Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-617 IntDtone1LwPss
Gain
International Dtone 1 Low
Pass Gain
Range = 1 to 65535 735
20-618 IntDtone1UprThr
shold
International Dtone 1 Upper
Threshold
Range = 1 to 65535 10752
20-619 IntDtone1LwrThr
shold
International Dtone 1 Lower
Threshold
Range = 1 to 65535 7168
20-620 DetTonesBefore-
dial
Select tones to detect
before dialling
0 = blind dial. 1 = detect
dial tone.
0
20-621 TimeBefore-dial Determines pause time
before dial (blind mode) or
dial tone detection time out.
Range = 0 to 255. 1 =
100 ms
5
20-622 PulseDialMake Make time for pulse dialling Range = 0 to 255. (1 ms
step)
33
20-623 PulseDialBreak Break time for pulse dialling Range = 0 to 255. (1 ms
step)
67
20-624 PulseDialInter-
digit
Inter digit pause for pulse
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
82
20-627 DetTonesAfter-
Dial
Select tones to detect after
dialling
0 = No Detect (ANSAM/
CED Only). 1 = Detect
BUSY/CED/ANSAM. 2 =
Detect Cong/CED/
ANSAM, 3 = Detect
BUSY/Cong/CED/
ANSAM
1
20-628 T0Timeout CED detect time from end of
dial to call clear down.
Range = 0 to 255. (1
second step)
45
20-629 AbandonCall Abandons call and does not
re-dial if T0 time out occurs
(no ANSAM/CED detection)
20-632 FaxTxSignalLev
Ln1Ln2
Fax modem Tx level for
line1 and 2
Range = 0 to 30 in -
0.5dB steps. 0 = 0dBm,
30 = -15dBm
10
20-634 BillingFilterTypeL
n1
Selects type of billing filter 0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-635 BillingFilterTypeL
n2
Selects type of billing filter 0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-636 FaxReceiveLevel Receive level 0 = -43dB. 1 = -48dB 0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
Tx level of DTMF high fre-
quency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
Tx level of DTMF low fre-
quency group
30 = -15dBm
10
20-639 FaxDTMFTone-
Time
DTMF tone time Range = 0 to 30000 ms
units
80
20-640 FaxDTMFIntdig-
itTime
DTMF inter digit time Range = 0 to 30000 ms
units
75
20-642 FaxDelayBe-
tweenFaxes
Delay between faxes Guard delay between
outgoing faxes. Range =
1 to 10 seconds
5
20-643 Line 1 Imped-
ance
Line 1 impedance 0 = complex 1 = 600
ohms
0
20-644 Line 2 Imped-
ance
Line 2 impedance 0 = complex 1 = 600
ohms
0
20-645 Line 1 Current Line 1 Current 0 = off 1 = on 1
20-648 FaxRingDetec-
torDwell
Ring detector dwell Range = 1 to 10000 ms 350
20-649 RingDetectorM-
inFreq
Ring detector min frequency (15Hz) Range = 1 to
65535
160
20-650 RingDetector-
MaxFreq
Ring detector max fre-
quency
(68Hz) Range = 1 to
65535
35
20-651 Ring1DetectAlgo
rithm
Ring 1 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-652 Ring1NumCellPa
ttern
Ring 1 number cell pattern Number of patterns to
Range = 0 to 3
1
20-653 Ring1TmoutRset
Detect
Ring 1 time out reset detec-
tor
Range = 10000 to 15000
ms
8000
20-654 FaxRing1MakeM
in1
Ring 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
ax1
Ring 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 5000
July 2005
20-656 FaxRing1MakeH
ole1
Ring 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 100
20-657 FaxRing1Break
Min1
Ring 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 125
Max1
Ring 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 5500
20-659 FaxRing1BreakH
ole1
Ring 1 break hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 100
20-660 FaxRing1IdxNext
Cell1
Ring 1 idx next cell 1 Index of next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-661 Ring1IdxRestart
Cell1
Ring 1 idx restart cell 1 Index to restart at.
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-662 Ring1FlgDetectP
erfd1
Ring 1 flag detection per-
formed 1
1
in2
ax2
ole2
Min2
Max2
ole2
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd2
formed 2
0
in3
ax3
ole3
Min3
Max3
ole3
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd3
formed 3
1
20-681 Ring2DetectAlgo
rithm
Ring 2 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-682 Ring2NumCellPa
ttern
Ring 2 number cell pattern Number of ring pattern
detectors. Range = 0 to 3
2
20-683 Ring2TmoutRes
etDetct
Ring 2 time out reset detec-
tor
Range = 1000 to 15000
ms
8000
in1
ax1
ole1
Min1
Max1
ole1
Cell1
Range = 0 to 2
1
Cell1
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd1
formed 1
0
in2
ax2
ole2
Min2
Max2
ole2
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
July 2005
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd2
formed 2
1
in3
ax3
ole3
Min3
Max3
ole3
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd3
formed 3
0
e1A1
Dtone 1 Filter stage 1 A1 Range = 1 to 65535 829
e1A2
e1A3
e1B1
Dtone 1 Filter stage 1 B1 Range = 1 to 65535 30963
e1B2
e2A1
e2A2
e2A3
e2B1
e2B2
20-721 Dtone1LowPass
Feedbck
Dtone 1 Low Pass Feed-
back
Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-722 FaxDtone1LowP
assGain
Dtone 1 Low Pass Gain Range = 1 to 65535 207
20-723 Dtone1UpperThr
eshold
Dtone 1 Upper Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 10752
20-724 Dtone1LowerThr
eshold
Dtone 1 Lower Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 7168
e1A1
e1A2
e1A3
e1B1
e1B2
e2A1
e2A2
e2A3
e2B1
e2B2
20-735 Dtone2LwPassF
eedback
Dtone 2 Low Pass Feed-
back
Range = 1 to 65535 32359
20-736 FaxDtone2LowP
assGain
Dtone 2 Low Pass Gain Range = 1 to 65535 735
20-737 Dtone2UpperThr
eshold
Dtone 2 Upper Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 10752
20-738 Dtone2LowerThr
eshold
Dtone 2 Lower Threshold Range = 1 to 65535 7168
20-739 Dtone1DetctAlgo
rithm
Dtone 1 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-740 Dtone1NumCell
Pattern
Dtone 1 number cell pattern Number of patterns to
Range = 0 to 3
2
20-741 Dtone1TmoutRs
etDetct
Dtone 1 time out reset
detector
Range = 1 to 15000 ms 100
20-742 FaxDtone1Make
Min1
Dtone 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 130
July 2005
Max1
Dtone 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
Hole1
Dtone 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 40
20-745 FaxDtone1Break
Min1
Dtone 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 130
Max1
Dtone 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
Hole1
Dtone 1 break hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 0
20-748 FaxDtone1IdxNx
tCell1
Dtone 1 idx next cell 1 Index of next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
1
20-749 Dtone1IdxRestrt
Cell1
Dtone 1 idx restart cell 1 Index to restart at.
Range = 0 to 2
0
20-750 Dtone1FlgDetctP
erfd1
Dtone 1 flag detection per-
formed 1
0
Min2
Max2
Hole2
Min2
Max2
Hole2
tCell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd2
formed 2
1
Min3
Max3
Hole3
Min3
Max3
Hole3
tCell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd3
formed 3
0
20-769 Dtone2DetctAlgo
rithm
Dtone 2 detection algorithm Range = 32 to 33 32
20-770 DtoneNumCell-
Pattern
Dtone 2 number cell pattern Number of ring pattern
detectors. Range = 0 to 3
1
20-771 DtoneTmoutRe-
setDetct
Dtone 2 time out reset
detector
Range = 1 to 15000 ms 100
Min1
Max1
Hole1
Min1
Max1
Hole1
tCell1
Range = 0 to 2
255
Cell1
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd1
formed 1
1
Min2
Max2
Hole2
Min2
Max2
Hole2
July 2005
tCell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell2
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd2
formed 2
0
Min3
Max3
Hole3
Min3
Max3
Hole3
tCell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
Cell3
Range = 0 to 2
0
erfd3
formed 3
0
20-799 FaxMaxAutore-
dials
The maximum range for the
auto re-dial attempts dis-
played in SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
20-800 LowimpAt-
LineSeize
Application of very low
impedance for approxi-
mately 350 ms at line sei-
zure.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
20-801 ProtReportOnEr-
ror
Allows Fax protocol report
to be printed in the event of
a communications error
0 = Off
1 = Auto Print
0
20-802 CEQTAP1 (Tap 1) Finite impulse
response digital filter with
programable coefficients
Range = 0 to 65535 1812
Range = 0 to 65535 2576
Range = 0 to 65535 4635
Range = 0 to 65535 05049
Range = 0 to 65535 6328
Range = 0 to 65535 5821
Range = 0 to 65535 4839
Range = 0 to 65535 3608
Range = 0 to 65535 80
Range = 0 to 65535 65408
Range = 0 to 65535 61681
Range = 0 to 65535 63319
Range = 0 to 65535 63564
Range = 0 to 65535 64445
Range = 0 to 65535 4800
Range = 0 to 65535 65267
Range = 0 to 65535 6624
Range = 0 to 65535 63174
July 2005
Range = 0 to 65535 63223
Range = 0 to 65535 63950
Range = 0 to 65535 56303
Range = 0 to 65535 8924
Range = 0 to 65535 63987
Range = 0 to 65535 6613
Range = 0 to 65535 4952
Range = 0 to 65535 49153
Range = 0 to 65535 804
Range = 0 to 65535 9659
Range = 0 to 65535 64874
Range = 0 to 65535 60506
20-832 CEQTX CEQ transmit path 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1
20-833 CEQRX CEQ receive path 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1
20-834 CEQTYPE CEQ type. Switch between
default filter coefficients and
custom settings
0 = Default
1 = Custom
0
20-835 CEQTAPTOTAL Total number of CEQ taps in
use
Range = 0 to 30 30
20-836 USSTOCKSUP-
PORTTX
The ability to enable or dis-
able legal / letter stock
(DCS)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1
20-837 USSTOCKSUP-
PORTRX
The ability to enable or dis-
able legal / letter stock (DIS)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1
20-838 EPTADJUST-
MENTS
Allow the ability to control
the Error Protect Tone
(EPT)
0 = No EPT
1 = Short EPT
2 = Long EPT
2
20-839 ARA2400BAUD2
400
Automatic rate adaption for
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 85
20-840 ARA2400BAUD4
800
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 82
20-841 ARA2400BAUD7
200
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 79
20-842 ARA2400BAUD9
600
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 75
20-843 ARA2400BAUD1
2000
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 68
20-844 ARA2400BAUD1
4400
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 60
20-845 ARA2400BAUD1
6800
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 53
20-846 ARA2400BAUD1
9200
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 46
20-847 ARA2400BAUD2
1600
2400 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 39
20-848 ARA2800BAUD2
400
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 0
20-849 ARA2800BAUD4
800
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 83
20-850 ARA2800BAUD7
200
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 81
20-851 ARA2800BAUD9
600
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 79
20-852 ARA2800BAUD1
2000
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 72
20-853 ARA2800BAUD1
4400
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 67
20-854 ARA2800BAUD1
6800
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 60
20-855 ARA2800BAUD1
9200
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 55
20-856 ARA2800BAUD2
1600
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 48
July 2005
20-857 ARA2800BAUD2
4000
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 43
20-858 ARA2800BAUD2
6400
2800 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 38
20-859 ARA3000BAUD2
400
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 0
20-860 ARA3000BAUD4
800
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 86
20-861 ARA3000BAUD7
200
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 83
20-862 ARA3000BAUD9
600
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 80
20-863 ARA3000BAUD1
2000
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 76
20-864 ARA3000BAUD1
4400
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 69
20-865 ARA3000BAUD1
6800
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 64
20-866 ARA3000BAUD1
9200
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 59
20-867 ARA3000BAUD2
1600
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 52
20-868 ARA3000BAUD2
4000
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 48
20-869 ARA3000BAUD2
6400
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 42
20-870 ARA3000BAUD2
8800
3000 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 36
20-871 ARA3200BAUD2
400
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 0
20-872 ARA3200BAUD4
800
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 88
20-873 ARA3200BAUD7
200
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 86
20-874 ARA3200BAUD9
600
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 84
20-875 ARA3200BAUD1
2000
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 79
20-876 ARA3200BAUD1
4400
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 73
20-877 ARA3200BAUD1
6800
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 67
20-878 ARA3200BAUD1
9200
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 62
20-879 ARA3200BAUD2
1600
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 57
20-880 ARA3200BAUD2
4000
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 51
20-881 ARA3200BAUD2
6400
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 42
20-882 ARA3200BAUD2
8800
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 35
20-883 ARA3200BAUD3
1200
3200 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 32
20-884 ARA3429BAUD2
400
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 0
20-885 ARA3429BAUD4
800
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 90
20-886 ARA3429BAUD7
200
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 88
20-887 ARA3429BAUD9
600
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 86
20-888 ARA3429BAUD1
2000
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 80
20-889 ARA3429BAUD1
4400
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 76
20-890 ARA3429BAUD1
6800
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 70
20-891 ARA3429BAUD1
9200
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 64
20-892 ARA3429BAUD2
1600
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 58
20-893 ARA3429BAUD2
4000
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 53
20-894 ARA3429BAUD2
6400
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 46
20-895 ARA3429BAUD2
8800
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 32
20-896 ARA3429BAUD3
1200
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 30
20-897 ARA3429BAUD3
3600
3429 baud rate
Range = 0 to 255 28
July 2005
6-87 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131c

dC131c Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (1 of 5)
Purpose
This procedure contains the tables which show the location and the NVM default values that
are unique to the UK, Switzerland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland, Austria and Finland.
Refer to the table for the appropriate country:
UK, Table 1
Switzerland, Table 2
Norway, Table 3
Denmark, Table 4
Ireland, Table 5
Austria, Table 6
Finland, Table 7
The NVM default values for other countries are in the locations that follow:
For France, Germany, Sweden, Belgium, Netherlands, Italy or Portugal, refer to dC131d.
For Greece, Spain, USA, Canada, Iceland, Luxembourg or Australia, refer to dC131e.
For Bulgaria, Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Cyprus, Czech Republic or Hungary, refer to
dC131f.
For India, Mexico, Poland, Romania, Russia, South Africa or Turkey, refer to dC131g.
Table 1 UK NVM Values
20-461 FaxBusy1MakeMin1 Busy 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
20-462 FaxBusy1MakeMax1 Busy 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 480
20-463 FaxBusy1MakeHole1 Busy 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
20-464 FaxBusy1BreakMin1 Busy 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
20-465 FaxBusy1BreakMax1 Busy 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 480
20-535 FaxCongest1MakeMin1 Congest 1 make min 1 Range = 1 to 10000 ms 300
20-536 FaxCongest1MakeMax1 Congest 1 make max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 500
20-537 FaxCongest1MakeHole
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
20-538 FaxCongest1BreakMin1 Congest 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 280
20-539 FaxCongest1BreakMax
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 440
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 655
20-552 Congt1FlgDetctPerfd2 Congest 1 flag detec-
tion performed 2
Is this the last detec-
tion pattern? Range =
0 to 1
1
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 655
20-622 PulseDialMake Make time for pulse
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
20-623 PulseDialBreak Break time for pulse
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
20-624 PulseDialInterdigit Inter digit pause for
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
82
July 2005
20-628 T0Timeout CED detect time from
end of dial to call clear
down.
Range = 0 to 255. (1
second step)
45
20-629 AbandonCall Abandons call and
does not re-dial if T0
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
20-632 FaxTxSignalLevLn1Ln2 Fax modem Tx level
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
20-634 BillingFilterTypeLn1 Selects type of billing
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
Tx level of DTMF high
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLowFreqLevel Tx level of DTMF low
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
20-639 FaxDTMFToneTime DTMF tone time Range = 0 to 30000 ms
units
80
20-640 FaxDTMFIntdigitTime DTMF inter digit time Range = 0 to 30000 ms
units
75
20-643 Line 1 Impedance Line 1 impedance 0 = complex 1 = 600
ohms
0
ohms
0
20-654 FaxRing1MakeMin1 Ring 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
20-655 FaxRing1MakeMax1 Ring 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 5000
20-656 FaxRing1MakeHole1 Ring 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 100
20-657 FaxRing1BreakMin1 Ring 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 125
20-658 FaxRing1BreakMax1 Ring 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 5500
20-659 FaxRing1BreakHole1 Ring 1 break hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 100
20-682 Ring2NumCellPattern Ring 2 number cell
pattern
Number of ring pattern
detectors. Range = 0 to
3
2
20-692 Ring2FlgDetectPerfd1 Ring 2 flag detection
performed 1
0 to 1
0
performed 2
0 to 1
1
20-742 FaxDtone1MakeMin1 Dtone 1 make min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 130
20-743 FaxDtone1MakeMax1 Dtone 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
20-744 FaxDtone1MakeHole1 Dtone 1 make hole 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 40
20-745 FaxDtone1BreakMin1 Dtone 1 break min 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 130
20-746 FaxDtone1BreakMax1 Dtone 1 break max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 270
20-750 Dtone1FlgDetctPerfd1 Dtone 1 flag detection
performed 1
0 to 1
0
20-755 FaxDtone1BreakMax2 Dtone 1 break max 2 Range = 0 to 10000
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
20-799 FaxMaxAutore-dials The maximum range
for the auto re-dial
attempts displayed in
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
July 2005
Table 2 Switzerland NVM values
20-536 FaxCongest1MakeMax
1
1
1
2
2
2
tion performed 2
tion pattern. Range = 0
to 1
1
3
3
3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
72
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
July 2005
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
20-682 Ring2NumCellPattern Ring 2 number cell pat-
tern
3
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 3 Norway NVM values
July 2005
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 220
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 220
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 220
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 220
tion performed 2
1
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 220
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 220
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
0
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
0
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
0
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHighFreqLevel Tx level of DTMF high
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
July 2005
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 4 Denmark NVM values
1
Congest 1 make max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 540
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 540
2
Congest 1 make max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 540
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
July 2005
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 540
tion performed 2
0
3
Congest 1 make max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 540
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 540
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
70
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
performed 1
0
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
July 2005
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 5 Ireland NVM values
1
Congest 1 make max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 520
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 520
2
Congest 1 make max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 520
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 520
tion performed 2
tion pattern? Range = 0
to 1
0
3
Congest 1 make max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 520
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 520
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
86
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
July 2005
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
20-640 FaxDTMFIntdigitTime DTMF Inter digit time Range = 0 to 30000 ms
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
2
performed 1
to 1
0
performed 2
to 1
1
performed 1
to 1
0
performed 2
to 1
1
performed 1
to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 6 Austria NVM values
July 2005
1
1
20-538 FaxCongest1BreakMin
1
1
2
2
2
2
tion performed 2
1
3
3
3
3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
100
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
Tx level of DTMF low
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
July 2005
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 7 Finland NVM values
July 2005
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
tion performed 2
1
3
3
3
3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
82
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
July 2005
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
July 2005
July 2005
6-101 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131d

dC131d Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (2 of 5)
Purpose
are unique to France, Germany, Sweden, Belgium, Netherlands, Italy and Portugal.
France, Table 1
Germany, Table 2
Sweden, Table 3
Belgium, Table 4
Netherlands, Table 5
Italy, Table 6
Portugal, Table 7
For the UK, Switzerland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland, Austria or Finland, refer to dC131c.
dC131f.
Table 1 France NVM values
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 550
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
20-538 FaxCongest1BreakMin1 Congest 1 break min
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 450
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 550
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 550
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 450
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 550
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 550
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 450
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 550
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
July 2005
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
90
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
performed 1
0
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 2 Germany NVM values
July 2005
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 260
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 260
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 260
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 260
tion performed 2
1
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 260
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 260
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
78
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
75
units
75
ohms
0
July 2005
ohms
0
pattern
3
2
performed 1
0
performed 2
1
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 3 Sweden NVM values
July 2005
1
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 800
2
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 800
tion performed 2
0 to 1
1
3
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 800
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
70
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
July 2005
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 4 Belgium NVM values
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 180
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 180
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 180
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 180
July 2005
tion performed 2
0 to 1
1
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 180
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 180
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
70
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
July 2005
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 5 Netherlands NVM values
Location NVM Name NVM Description Value
Defaul
t
20-536 FaxCongest1MakeMax1 Congest 1 make max 1 Range = 0 to 10000 ms 330
1
1
2
2
tion performed 2
1
3
3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
38
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
62
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
Defaul
t
July 2005
20-632 FaxTxSignalLevLn1Ln2 Fax modem Tx level for
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
Defaul
t
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 6 Italy NVM values
Defaul
t
July 2005
1
1
2
2
tion performed 2
0 to 1
1
3
3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
20-624 PulseDialinterdigit inter digit pause for
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
88
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
20-632 FaxTxSignalLevLn1Ln2 Fax modem Tx level for
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
July 2005
tern
3
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 7 Portugal NVM values
July 2005
1
1
1
2
2
2
tion performed 2
1
3
3
3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
20-624 PulseDialInterdigit inter digit pause for
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
July 2005
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
July 2005
July 2005
6-115 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131e

dC131e Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (3 of 5)
Purpose
are unique to Greece, Spain, USA, Canada, Iceland, Luxembourg and Australia.
Greece, Table 1
Spain, Table 2
USA, Table 3
Canada, Table 4
Iceland, Table 5
Luxembourg, Table 6
Australia, Table 7
dC131f.
Table 1 Greece NVM values
20-535 FaxCongest1MakeMi
n1
20-536 FaxCongest1MakeMa
x1
20-537 FaxCongest1MakeHol
e1
20-538 FaxCongest1BreakMi
n1
20-539 FaxCongest1BreakMa
x1
n2
x2
e2
n2
x2
20-552 Congt1FlgDetctPerfd2 Congest 1 flag detection
performed 2
0
n3
x3
e3
n3
x3
July 2005
20-622 PulseDialMake Make time for pulse dial-
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
38
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
62
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
86
20-629 AbandonCall Abandons call and does
not re-dial if T0 time out
occurs (no ANSAM/CED
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
20-632 FaxTxSignalLevLn1Ln
2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
20-634 BillingFilterTypeLn1 Selects type of billing fil-
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
20-799 FaxMaxAutore-dials The maximum range for
the auto re-dial attempts
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 2 Spain NVM values
July 2005
n1
x1
e1
n1
x1
n2
x2
e2
n2
x2
20-550 Congest1IdxNextCell2 Congest 1 idx next cell 2 Index next pattern.
Range = 0 to 2
2
performed 2
0
n3
x3
e3
n3
x3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
20-623 PulseDialBreak Break time for pulse dial-
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
75
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
July 2005
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 3 USA NVM values
July 2005
20-535 FaxCongest1MakeMin
1
x1
e1
n1
x1
2
x2
e2
n2
x2
tion performed 2
0 to 1
1
3
x3
e3
n3
x3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
occurs (no ANSAM/
CED detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
1
2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
15
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
tern
3
1
July 2005
performed 1
0 to 1
1
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
1
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 4 Canada NVM values
1
x1
e1
1
July 2005
x1
2
x2
e2
2
x2
performed 2
1
3
x3
e3
3
x3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
1
2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
15
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
July 2005
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 5 Iceland NVM values
1
x1
e1
n1
x1
2
x2
e2
n2
x2
performed 2
0
3
x3
e3
n3
July 2005
x3
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. 1(1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
70
occurs (no ANSAM/
CED detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
1
2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
July 2005
Table 6 Luxembourg NVM values
n1
x1
e1
n1
x1
n2
x2
e2
n2
x2
performed 2
1
n3
x3
e3
n3
x3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
90
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
July 2005
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 7 Australia NVM values
July 2005
n1
x1
20-537 FaxCongest1MakeHo
le1
n1
20-539 FaxCongest1BreakM
ax1
n2
x2
le2
n2
ax2
20-552 Congt1FlgDetctPerfd
2
performed 2
0 to 1
0
n3
x3
le3
n3
ax3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
20-632 FaxTxSignalLevLn1L
n2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
1
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
tern
3
2
July 2005
20-692 Ring2FlgDetectPerfd
1
Ring 2 flag detection
performed 1
0 to 1
0
2
performed 2
0 to 1
1
20-744 FaxDtone1MakeHole
1
20-746 FaxDtone1BreakMax
1
20-750 Dtone1FlgDetctPerfd
1
Dtone 1 flag detection
performed 1
0 to 1
0
2
2
Dtone 1 break max 2 Range = 0 to 10000
ms
1150
2
performed 2
0 to 1
1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
2
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 9
July 2005
July 2005
6-129 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131f

dC131f Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (4 of 5)
Purpose
are unique to Bulgaria, Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Cyprus, Czech Republic and Hungary.
Bulgaria, Table 1
Argentina, Table 2
Brazil, Table 3
Chile, Table 4
Cyprus, Table 5
Czech Republic, Table 6
Hungary, Table 7
Table 1 Bulgaria NVM values
n1
20-536 FaxCongest1MakeM
ax1
20-537 FaxCongest1MakeH
ole1
n1
ax1
n2
ax2
ole2
n2
ax2
2
performed 2
0
n3
ax3
ole3
n3
ax3
July 2005
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
n2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
20-682 Ring2NumCellPatter
n
Ring 2 number cell pat-
tern
3
1
1
performed 1
1
2
performed 2
0
20-743 FaxDtone1MakeMax
1
1
20-745 FaxDtone1BreakMin
1
1
1
performed 1
0
2
2
2
2
ms
1150
2
performed 2
1
1
performed 1
1
2
2
July 2005
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 11
Table 2 Argentina NVM values
n1
x1
le1
n1
ax1
n2
x2
le2
n2
ax2
2
performed 2
1
n3
x3
le3
n3
ax3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
n2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
15
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
July 2005
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
tern
3
1
1
performed 1
1
2
performed 2
0
1
1
1
performed 1
1
2
2
2
performed 2
0
1
performed 1
1
2
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 3 Brazil NVM values
Locatio
n NVM Name NVM Description Value Default
20-462
FaxBusy1MakeMax1
July 2005
n1
ax1
ole1
in1
ax1
n2
ax2
ole2
in2
ax2
Locatio
2
performed 2
0 to 1
1
n3
ax3
ole3
in3
ax3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
20-624 PulseDialInterdigit inter digit pause for pulse
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
n2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
15
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
quency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
Locatio
July 2005
n
tern
3
1
1
formed 1
0 to 1
1
2
formed 2
0 to 1
0
1
1
1
1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
2
Locatio
2
2
2
ms
0
2
performed 2
0 to 1
0
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
2
2
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 4 Chile NVM values
20-462
FaxBusy1MakeMax1
Locatio
July 2005
n1
ax1
ole1
in1
ax1
n2
ax2
ole2
in2
ax2
2
performed 2
1
n3
ax3
ole3
in3
ax3
ling
Range = 0 to 255. 1(1
ms step)
40
ling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
20-624 PulseDialInterdigit inter digit pause for pulse
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
detection)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
n2
line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
15
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
ter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
20-638 FaxDTMFLow-
FreqLevel
quency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
July 2005
n
tern
3
1
1
formed 1
1
2
formed 2
0
1
1
1
1
1
performed 1
1
2
2
2
2
ms
0
2
performed 2
0
1
performed 1
1
2
2
displayed in SA/KO.
Linked to ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 5 Cyprus NVM values
July 2005
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
tion performed 2
0 to 1
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
60
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
July 2005
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 4
Table 6 Czech Rep. NVM values
20-464 FaxBusy1BreakMin1 Busy 1 break min 1 range = 0 to 10000 ms 25
20-535 FaxCongest1MakeMin1 Congest 1 make min
1
Range = 1 to 10000 ms 25
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 700
20-537 FaxCongest1MakeHole1 Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 25
20-539 FaxCongest1BreakMax1 Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 700
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 25
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 700
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 25
July 2005
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 700
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 25
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 700
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 25
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 700
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
90
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
July 2005
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 11
Table 7 Hungary NVM values
1
Congest 1 make max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
2
Congest 1 make max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
tion performed 2
0 to 1
0
3
Congest 1 make max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
75
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
July 2005
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
20-637 FaxDTMFHigh-
FreqLevel
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
pattern
3
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
performed 2
0 to 1
0
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 8
July 2005
July 2005
6-143 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) dC131g

dC131g Fax Country Dependant NVM Values (5 of 5)
Purpose
are unique to India, Mexico, Poland, Romania, Russia, South Africa and Turkey.
India, Table 1
Mexico, Table 2
Poland, Table 3
Romania, Table 4
Russia, Table 5
South Africa, Table 6
Turkey, Table 7
dC131f.
Table 1 India NVM values
1
Range = 1 to 10000 ms 150
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
July 2005
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
60
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
20-634 BillingFilterTypeLn1 Selects type of bill-
ing filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-635 BillingFilterTypeLn2 Selects type of bill-
ing filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
20-637 FaxDTMFHighFreqLevel Tx level of DTMF
high frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
pattern
3
2
performed 1
0
performed 2
1
20-750 Dtone1FlgDetctPerfd1 Dtone 1 flag detec-
tion performed 1
0
ms
1150
tion performed 2
1
tion performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 5
July 2005
Table 2 Mexico NVM values
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
1
Congest 1 make hole
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Congest 1 break max
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Congest 1 make hole
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Congest 1 break max
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
tion performed 2
1
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
3
Congest 1 make hole
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Congest 1 break max
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
15
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
10
units
80
units
75
July 2005
ohms
1
ohms
1
pattern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
ms
0
performed 2
0
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
Table 3 Poland NVM values
July 2005
1
Range = 1 to 10000 ms 350
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 650
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 650
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 650
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 650
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 650
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 650
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
90
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
6
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
units
80
units
75
ohms
1
ohms
1
pattern
3
1
performed 1
1
July 2005
performed 2
0
tion performed 1
0
ms
1150
tion performed 2
1
tion performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 10
Table 4 Romania NVM values
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
July 2005
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 250
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
12
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
6
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
8
units
65
units
65
ohms
1
ohms
1
pattern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
July 2005
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 10
Table 5 Russia NVM values
1
Range = 1 to 10000 ms 50
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 50
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 50
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 50
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 50
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 50
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
40
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
60
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
80
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
July 2005
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
0
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
4
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
6
units
65
units
65
ohms
1
ohms
1
pattern
3
1
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 3
Table 6 South Africa NVM values
July 2005
1
Range = 1 to 10000 ms 150
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
tion performed 2
0 to 1
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 150
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 350
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
90
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
9
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
11
units
65
units
65
ohms
0
ohms
0
July 2005
pattern
3
2
performed 1
0 to 1
0
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
0 to 1
1
performed 1
0 to 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 10
Table 7 Turkey NVM values
July 2005
1
Range = 1 to 10000 ms 75
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 75
1
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 75
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 75
2
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
tion performed 2
0
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 75
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 30
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 75
3
Range = 0 to 10000 ms 600
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
33
dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (1
ms step)
67
pulse dialling
Range = 0 to 255. (10
ms step)
90
time out occurs (no
ANSAM/CED detec-
tion)
0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled
0
for line1 and 2
30 = -15dBm
10
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
filter
0 = None. 1 = 12Khz.
2 = 16KHz
2
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
9
frequency group
30 = -15dBm
11
units
100
units
100
ohms
0
ohms
0
pattern
3
1
July 2005
performed 1
1
performed 2
0
performed 1
0
ms
1150
performed 2
1
performed 1
1
SA/KO. Linked to
ID204
Range = 0 to 14 14
July 2005
dC132 NVM Initialisation
There are 4 items under this heading:
Copier NVM Initialisation
Network Controller NVM initialisation
Embedded Fax NVM initialisation
NVM to Install Condition
NOTE: Certain NVM settings are password protected.
Copier NVM Initialisation
Purpose
The NVM initialisation routine provides the means for the CSE to reset specific machine vari-
able NVM or all machine variable NVM non-volatile memory (with the exception of Protected
NVM for which a password is required) to their default values.
Description
If the machine configuration changes through the addition of an input or output device, an ini-
tialisation of the NVM for that device must be performed to make sure that all configuration val-
ues are correct for that device.
NOTE: initialisation does not affect the billing counter, accounting, fault counter, diagnostic
data, or auditron services. These, with the exception of billing counters, can be reset if the
machine is restored to the install state using the NVM to Install Condition procedure.
NOTE: The auditron (billing counters) is initialized using the auditron setup routine, refer to the
User Guide.
The market region configuration attribute must have been preset at the factory or at first install
to ensure that the NVM default values are regionally correct. Some post install configuration
can be performed using the configuration tool, refer to dC131 NVM Read / Write.
Procedure
4. Select Copier Routines, 132 NVM initialisation.
5. Touch the appropriate button to select the NVM to be initialized and follow the on screen
instructions. Refer to Table 1, for the functions that are reset to default.
All Copier NVM.
Machine Variable NVM, (i.e. paper path, platen and DADH registration).
SA / KO Dust Off.
System Counters Dust Off
NOTE: The NVM window will gray out while the initialisation is in progress.
6. Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
Network Controller NVM initialisation
Purpose
To return to default network settings, configuration and flags.
Description
There are three routines:
All Network NVM - This initialisation will default all network and configuration settings to a
pre-installation state.
Variable NVM - The items that will be initialised are related to crash recovery, software
upgrade settings, alterate boot and any other items needing to be set to default values
that are not included in the network controller configuration inialisation routine.
Configuration NVM - This initialisation will clear all fault and system usage counters, net-
work controller variable, configuration NVM and reset the network controller error log.
Procedure
4. Select Network Routines, 132 NVM initialisation-Network.
5. Touch the appropriate button to select the NVM to be initialized and follow the on screen
instructions.
Embedded Fax NVM initialisation
Purpose
To return to default the embedded fax NVM settings that are stored on the compact flash card.
Refer to dC131b NVM table chain 20 table 6.
Procedure
4. Select Fax dC Routines, 132 NVM initialisation
5. Touch the appropriate button to select the NVM to be initialized and follow the screen
instructions. Refer to Table 2, for the functions that are reset to default.
Reformat
All Fax Directories
Fax Job NVM
Fax Configuration NVM
Fax SA / KO Settings NVM
July 2005
NVM to Install Condition
The Dust Off routines are available to return the machine to a pre-installed state, refer to Table
1.
Dust Off
CAUTION
If a network controller is installed, the Dust Off routine for the network controller must be per-
formed before the NVM Dust Off routine.
The NVM Dust Off routine will:
Clear all non-billing counters.
Default all SA / KO NVM including default PINs.
Clear fault history.
Set the install NVM (install Byte) to default to enable an install procedure at the next
power-on, while retaining all existing configuration NVM e.g. paper path registration, xero-
graphic parameters and market configuration values.
NOTE: The auditron is initialized using the auditron setup routine, refer to User Guide.
Not alter any protected NVM.
The routine is accessed and performed as follows:
3. If the copier is fitted with a network controller, perform the network controller Dust Off pro-
cedure before continuing with this procedure.
4. Select Diagnostic Routines, then Copier Routines, then 132 NVM initialisation-Copier,
Dust Off NVM.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Table 1 Copier NVM
Initialization Function
All Copier
NVM
Machine
Variable
NVM
SA / KO
Dust Off
System
counters
Dust Off
NVM ALL
IOT (with Flag type: = Reset All
Billing Counter N
System Usage Counter Y Y
Fault Counter Y Y
Diagnostic Counter Y Y
SA / KO Setting Y Y
Fault Log Y
Configuration Y
Diagnostic Y
Debug Y
NVM Machine Variable
IOT with Flag type: = Reset Nominal
Machine Variable Zero Y Y
Machine Variable Registration Y Y
Machine Variable Paper Path Y Y
Machine Variable DADH Y Y
Machine Variable Platen Y Y
Auditron Y Y
Crash Recovery Y
Completed Job Log Y
Controller Access
Machine Speed, Market Region
N
JBA Database Y Y
JBA Configuration Y Y
HFSI Counter N N N N
Table 2 Embedded Fax NVM
Fax file type Category
Reformat
Reset All
Reset
Directories
Reset
Jobs
Reset
Configuration
Reset
Variables
Dial Directories Y Y
Group Directories Y Y
Junk Directories Y Y
Logo Directories Y Y
Mailbox Directories Y Y
Poll Directories Y Y
Jobs Sets Y Y
Image Y Y
Bitmaps Y Y
Job ID Y Y
Mailboxes Y Y
Alarm Y Y
Fax Protocol Trace Y Y
Protocol Records Y Y
Container Versions Y Y
Fax NVM Category =
NVM Configuration
Y Y Y
Fax NVM Category =
NVM SA / KO Settings
Y Y Y
Table 1 Copier NVM
Initialization Function
All Copier
NVM
Machine
Variable
NVM
SA / KO
Dust Off
System
counters
Dust Off
July 2005
July 2005

dC305 UI Test
Purpose
To initiate component testing of the local UI. This function also provides a means to test the UI
memory and to restart the local UI.
Description
The tests that can be performed are:
1. User Interface Button Test - tests the keys on the user interface.
2. Audio Tone Test - produces audible tones at the user interface.
3. LED Indicator Test - energizes all LEDs on the user interface.
4. Touch Area Test - enables the tester to test all areas on the touch panel.
5. Display Pixel Test - tests the individual pixels on the user interface.
6. Video Memory Test - tests that the SRAM used by the video controller on the local user
interface is functioning properly.
7. Communications Self Test - tests communications with the image processor.
8. Reset User Interface - used to restart/reboot the UI, will cause the POST to start.
9. Application Checksum Verification - permits access to a procedure that displays and veri-
fies the checksum and can display any errors found.
Procedure
2. Select, Diagnostics Routines, Copier Routines, dC 305 UI Tests.
3. Touch the appropriate test button.
4. Touch Start Test and follow the on-screen instructions.
dC312 Network Echo Tests
Purpose
To enable verification of the machines connectivity to an attached network. Performing a test
will give the result, pass or fail, eliminating the possibility of the machines hardware being at
fault during a diagnostic session. In addition it will test the machines network drivers.
Description
The dC 312 Echo Test is available through two pathways
1. Diagnostics pathway, dC 312 (available to the CSE).
2. Tools pathway (for use by the System Administrator and the Key Operator).
NOTE: The Tools window does not have a test for; Internal TCP / IP.
TCP/IP.
Novell or IPX.
NetBIOS / NetBEUI.
Apple Talk.
Internal TCP / IP - Will initiate a ping to the IP device name local host. This test is per-
formed to make sure that the IP stack is up and the hosts file is intact.
Procedure
2. Select, Network Routines, dC 312 Echo Test.
NOTE: If the network controller is not available the dC 312 Echo Test button is grayed out
and disabled.
NOTE: The feature button is grayed out and disabled for unavailable protocols.
July 2005
dC314 Network Connectivity Tests
Purpose
To assist the SA and CSE to isolate the cause of printing, feature network scanning, or network
fax problems. The test will interrogate each device on the network so that they respond with
their identity and other information. The data files will be stored on the network controller (files
deleted at next boot) and can be retrieved. Refer to GP 5 Portable Workstation and Tools.
Description
The network interface tests that can be performed are:
1. Novell (IPX)
Frame type (local network devices only).
Server name.
Print queue name.
Server internal network number.
Server node (media access control) address.
Server NOS version number.
Hop count to device (local net), extended test.
Is the printer attached to file server status.
Is the printer attached to print queue status.
NDPS enabled
2. Apple Talk
ESS port id.
Device type (router, print server, file server, workstation etc.).
NBP registered device name, such as:
Appleshare file server name or;
Novell PAP server name or;
PAP printer registered name.
Device NBP protocol address.
Device media access control (MAC) address.
Network number.
Zone name.
Sub zone names.
Device OS version number.
Hop count to device.
3. NetBIOS/NetBEUI
No data need be collected as the network controller has a dynamic internal name
table stored in RAM.
4. TCP/IP
network controller interface where host discovered (Enet).
Device name.
Device subnet mask.
Device IP address.
Device media access control (MAC) address.
Gateway IP address.
Procedure
2. Select, Network Routines, dC 314 Network Connectivity Test.
NOTE: If the network controller is not available the dC 314 Network Connectivity Test but-
ton is grayed out and disabled.
NOTE: The feature button is grayed out and disabled for unavailable protocols.
July 2005
dC330 Component Control
Purpose
To show the status of input components e.g. sensors, and to energies and exercise output
components e.g. motors, solenoids.
Description
Output and input component codes are entered into the Component Control Table on the UI,
and then energized individually or in permitted groups. The codes in the tables are grouped in
function chain (GP 2) order.
Go to the appropriate procedure:
Input Components
Output Components
Input Components
When the appropriate code is entered the status of the component will be shown on the UI.
NOTE: The logic level shown on the circuit diagrams with the signal name will be the actual
signal as measured with a service meter. This will not necessarily be the same as the logic
state shown on the UI, especially where the output is inverted. When testing components using
these control codes, look for a change in state, not for a high or low.
The displayed status of the input component can be changed by causing the component status
to change, e.g. operating a sensor with a sheet of paper. When a sensor is operated a beep
will sound.
Go to the appropriate table:
Table 1 Input codes 01
Table 2 Input Codes 05
Output Components
When the appropriate code is entered, the component will energize for a set time and then stop
in order to protect the components. The default time-out for most components is set at 90 s, but
can be as short as 5 s. Some components require that other components are energized at the
same time and it is possible to enter and energize up to six component control codes (not fax),
but only in permitted groups. If illegal combination of codes are entered the illegal codes will
not energize.
Go to the appropriate table:
Table 11 Output Codes 04
Procedure
CAUTION
Do not press Exit before stopping any energized components. The UI may lock up and grey
out. If this occurs, switch off the machine, GP 14 and remove the power cord. Reconnect the
power cord and switch on the machine GP 14.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Select Diagnostics Routines.
3. Select required dC routine category:
Copier Routines, 330 Component Control.
Fax dC Routines, 330 Component Control.
4. Select and input the required codes as follows:
NOTE: After a fault condition it may be necessary to switch off the machine and switch on
the machine (GP 14) for the codes to operate.
NOTE: To clear an incorrectly entered code and reset the Add Component button to
00.000, press the hard key C.
a. From the component control Input Components tables and the Output Components
tables, select and enter the appropriate code into the Add Component button, and
touch the button. This will add the component to the top of the Component Name
table list, and when the list is full; the addition of more components will cause com-
ponents to be deleted from the bottom of the list.
NOTE: Fax component control codes can only be energized one at a time.
b. If a control code is not known, it can be selected from the list displayed when the
Find Component button is touched, as follows:
NOTE: The Find Component button is not available if components are energized.
i. Enter the chain number into the Chain: button and touch the Find Component
button to display the control codes for that chain.
ii. Use the scroll buttons to locate the required code, touch the Component Name
button to highlight it and touch Select.
iii. Repeat as required to add components to the Component Name table.
iv. Touch Save to save the selections to the Component Name table list and return
to the Component Control window.
5. To energize a component or group of components:
a. Touch the control code to highlight it.
b. Touch Start.
July 2005
c. The status of the component is shown in the Status column i.e.:
i. On
ii. Off
iii. High
iv. Low
v. A numeric value with up to four digits e.g. 0020.
6. Touching a component in the component table and then touching Stop, stops that compo-
nent. To stop all components touch Stop All.
7. Touching Exit closes the Component Control window.
8. To exit diagnostics mode, GP 1, select the Call Close Out button.
July 2005
Input Codes
Code Displayed Name Description General
01-300 Front Door Inter-
lock
Front door interlock switch (S01-
300)
High = door closed, low =
door open
01-305 Left Door Interlock Left hand door interlock (S01-305) High = door closed, low =
door open
05-300 DADH closed
switch
DADH closed switch (S05-300) High = DADH lowered, low
= DADH raised
05-305 DADH cover inter-
lock
Top cover interlock switch (S05-
305).
High = cover closed, low =
cover open
05-310 DADH doc present
sen
Document present sensor (Q05-
310).
High = document present,
low = no document
05-315 DADH length sen-
sor 1
DADH length sensor 1 (Q05-315). High = document present,
low = no document
05-320 DADH length sen-
sor 2
DADH length sensor 2 (Q05-320). High = document present,
low = no document
05-325 DADH width sensor Document width sensor (Q05-325). Analogue output, refer to
dC502
05-330 DADH feed sensor Feed sensor (Q05-330). High = document present,
low = no document
05-335 DADH takeaway
sensor
Takeaway sensor (Q05-335). High = document present,
low = no document
05-340 DADH reg sensor Registration sensor (Q05-340). High = document present,
low = no document
05-345 DADH exit sensor Exit sensor Q05-345). High = document present,
low = no document
05-350 DADH CVT sensor CVT sensor (Q05-350). High = document present,
low = no document
06-320 ROS Motor Ready
Snr
Detects when ROS motor is at
required speed.
High = motor ready. Toggle
ROS motor (06-020) on
and off to check sensor.
06-340 ROS Ready Indicates that the ROS laser has
reached its operating level and the
ROS motor is up to required speed.
High = ready. Toggle ROS
motor (06-020) on and off
to check sensor. The ROS
laser level will only be set
once the ROS motor has
reached the required
speed.
07-301 T1 Home Switch Tray 1 home switch (S07-301) High = tray home, low =
tray not home
tray not home
07-303 T3 Home Switch Tray 3 home switch (S07-303) High = tray home. low =
tray not home
tray not home
07-311 T1 Size Switch 1 Size switch 1 (S07-311) High = made
07-323 T2 Size Switch 3 auto size sensing (optional). High = made
07-331 T1 Empty Sensor Tray 1 empty sensor (Q07-331) High = tray empty, low =
paper in tray
paper in tray
paper in tray
paper in tray
07-335 Bypass Empty Sensor Bypass empty sensor (Q07-335) High = tray empty, low =
paper in tray
07-341 T1 Paper Low Switch Tray 1 low paper switch (S07-341) High = more than 25%
full, low = less than 25%
full
07-342 T2 Paper Low Switch Tray 2 low paper switch (S07-342) High = more than 25%
full, low = less than 35%
full
07-350 Bypass Width Sensor Bypass width sensor (Q07-335) display indicates width
setting 100 to 300 mm
(3.93 to 11.81 inch)
07-383 T3 Stack Height Sen Tray 3 stack height sensor (Q07-
383)
High = top of stack
sensed, low = top of
stack not sensed
07-384 T4 Stack Height Sen Tray 4 stack height sensor (Q07-
384)
High = top of stack
sensed, low = top of
stack not sensed
July 2005
08-100 Wait Sensor Wait sensor (Q08-100), detects
when lead edge of paper at wait
point.
High = paper present,
low = no paper
08-101 T1 Feed Sensor Detects when lead edge of paper is
at tray 1 feed sensor, (Q08-101)
low = no paper
low= no paper
low = no paper
low = no paper
08-106 Bypass Feed Sensor Detects when lead edge of paper is
at bypass feed sensor, (Q08-106)
low = no paper
08-150 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the regis-
tration sensor (Q08-150)
low = no paper
08-160 Duplex Sensor Detects when paper is at the duplex
sensor (Q08-160)
low = no paper
09-060 HVPS Fault Detects a fault in the HVPS High = fault, low = good
09-070 Scorotron cleaner
home sensor
Detects the scorotron cleaning
head in the home position
High = head not home,
low = head in home
position
09-310 Low Toner Sensor Low toner sensor (Q09-310) High = toner in sump,
low = toner depleted
09-350 Waste Toner Full Sen Waste toner full sensor(Q09-350)
detects when waste toner reaches
a certain level in the container.
High = container full,
low = container not full
09-360 Toner Conc. Sensor Toner concentration sensor (Q09-
360)
Displays toner concen-
tration level in %
09-365 Humidity Sensor Relative humidity sensor (Q09-365) Displays RH%
09-370 Dev. Temp. Sensor Developer temperature sensor
(Q09-370)
Displays temperature in
degrees C
09-375 Ambient Temp. Sensor Ambient temperature sensor (Q09-
375)
Displays temperature in
degrees C
09-380 Waste Toner Door Sw Waste toner door switch (S09-380)
detects if the waste bottle is miss-
ing or the door is open during run
High = bottle present/
door closed, low = bottle
missing/door open
10-100 Fuser Exit Switch Fuser exit switch (S10-100),
detects when paper exits the fuser
low = no paper
10-120 IOT Exit Sensor IOT exit sensor (Q10-120), detects
when paper exits the IOT
low = no paper
10-300 Fuser Temp Sensor A Displays current thermistor values.
Converts input resistance of ther-
mistors and shows A-D conversion.
0-255 degrees C.
10-310 Fuser Temp Sensor B Displays current thermistor values.
Converts input resistance of ther-
mistors and shows A-D conversion.
0-255 degrees C.
10-315 Fuser Temp Fault Snr Detects fault in fuser thermistor. High = fault low = good
11-035 Bin 1 Empty Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM bin 1 empty
sensor (Q11-035)
High = bin empty, low =
bin not empty
11-041 Bin 2 Empty Sensor HCSS bin 2 empty sensor (Q11-
041)
High = bin empty, low =
bin not empty
11-100 Entry Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM entry
sensor (Q11-100)
low = no paper
11-110 Punch Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM punch
position sensor (Q11-110)
low = no paper
11-120 Compiler Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM Compiler
sensor (Q11-120) detects when
paper enters the compiler carriage
low = no paper
11-130 Top Exit Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM top
exit sensor (Q11-130)
low = no paper
11-140 2nd to Top Exit Snr LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM 2nd to
top exit sensor (Q11-140) detects
paper exiting to the bin (bin 1)
High = paper present
low = no paper
11-160 BM Entry Sensor HCSS BM entry sensor (Q11-160)
detects paper entry to the booklet
maker
low = no paper
11-190 BM Paper Present
Sensor
HCSS BM paper present sensor
(Q11-190) detects when paper is
present in the booklet maker com-
piling area
low = no paper
11-300 Docking Interlock LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM dock-
ing interlock switch (S11-300)
High = docked, low =
un-docked
11-301 Top Bin Interlock HCSS and HCSS BM top bin inter-
lock sensor (Q11-301)
High = bin lowered, low
= bin raised
11-302 Top Cover Intlk LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM top
cover interlock switch (S11-302),
detects if top cover is open.
High = closed, low =
open
11-303 Front Door Intlk LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM front
door interlock switch (S11-303),
detects if front door is open.
High = closed, low =
open
July 2005
11-304 Top Exit Gate Intlk HCSS upper exit gate interlock
switch (S11-305A) detects when
upper exit gate is open
High = gate closed, low
= gate open
11-305 Lwr Exit Gate Intlk HCSS lower exit gate interlock
switch (S11-305A) detects when
lower exit gate is open
High = gate closed, low
= gate open
11-310 Tamp Front Home Snr LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM front
tamper home sensor (Q11-310)
Detect if front tamper is home
High = home, low = not
home
11-311 Tamp Rear Home Snr LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM rear
tamper home sensor (Q11-311),
detects if rear tamper is home
high = home, low - not
home
11-313 CC 90% Full Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM compiler car-
riage 90% full sensor (Q11-313),
detects when the stack in bin1 or
bin 2 is 90% full
High = stack sensed,
low = stack not sensed
11-314 CC Bin Height Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM compiler car-
riage bin height sensor (Q11-314),
detects the height of the paper
stack in bin1 or bin 2
11-315 CC Upper Limit
Switch
HCSS compiler carriage upper limit
switch (S11-315) detects the upper
limit of compiler carriage travel
High = carriage
detected, low = car-
riage not detected
11-316 CC Lower Limit
Switch
HCSS compiler carriage lower limit
switch (S11-316) detects the lower
limit of compiler carriage travel
High = carriage
detected, low = car-
riage not detected
11-317 CC Safety Switch HCSS an HCSS BM compiler car-
riage safety switch (S11-317) inter-
rupts +24V to the compiler carriage
when the eject housing is open
High = +24V supplied
low = +24V not supplied
11-319 Tamp Rear Away Snr LCSS rear tamper away home sen-
sor (Q11-319), detects if the rear
tamper is at the away home posi-
tion
High = away home, low
= not away home
11-320 Ejector Home Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM ejector home
sensor (Q11-320) detects the home
(closed) position of the ejector
housing. LCSS ejector home sen-
sor (Q11-320) detects the home
position of the ejector assembly
home
11-322 Ejector Out Sensor LCSS Ejector out sensor (Q11-322)
detects the out position of the ejec-
tor assembly
High = out, low= not out
11-326 Paddle Roll Home
Snr
LCSS paddle roll position sensor,
HCSS and HCSS BM paddle roll
home sensor (Q11-326) detects the
home position of the paddle roll
home
11-330 Bin0 90% Full Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM bin 0 90% full
sensor (Q11-330) detects when bin
0 is 90% or more full
High = 90% or more full,
low = less than 90% full
11-331 Bin 1 90% Full Sen-
sor
LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM bin 1
90% full sensor (Q11-331) detects
when bin 1 is 90% or more full
11-332 Bin 1 Upper Level Snr LCSS bin 1 upper level sensor
(Q11-332) detects the top of the
paper stack in bin 1
11-333 Bin 1 Lower Level Snr LCSS bin 1 lower level sensor
(Q11-333) detects the top of the
paper stack in bin 1
11-334 Bin 1 Upper Limit SW LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM bin 1
upper limit switch (S11-334) detects
the upper limit of bin 1 movement
High = bin detected, low
= bin not detected
11-335 Bin 1 Lower Limit SW LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM bin 1
upper limit switch (S11-335) detects
the lower limit of bin 1 movement
= bin not detected
11-336 Bin 1 Mot Encoder
Snr
LCSS bin 1 motor encoder sensor
(Q11-336) generates motor speed
pulses
High = bar in encoder
wheel, low = gap in
encoder wheel
11-337 Bin1 Offset Sensor HCSS and HCSS BM bin 1 offset
sensor (Q11-337) detects the offset
and home position of bin 1
High = tray moving from
home to offset, low =
tray moving from offset
to home
11-344 Bin2 Upper Limit Sw HCSS bin 2 upper limit switch (S11-
344) detects the upper limit of bin 2
travel
= bin not detected
11-345 Bin2 Lower Limit Sw HCSS bin 2 lower limit switch (S11-
345) detects the lower limit of bin 2
travel
= bin not detected
11-347 Bin2 Offset Sensor HCSS bin 2 offset sensor (Q11-
347) detects the offset and home
position of bin 1
to home
11-348 Chad Bin Lvl Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM chad
bin full sensor (Q11-348) detects
when the weight of the chad
reaches a pre-set value
High = bin full, low = bin
not full
July 2005
11-350 Punch Head Home
Snr
LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM punch
head home sensor (Q11-350)
detects the home position of the
punch head
High = punch home, low
= punch not home
11-351 Punch Hd Present
Snr
LCSS punch head present sensor
(Q11-351) detects if a hole punch is
installed
High = punch installed,
low = punch not
installed
11-360 SH 1 Home Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
head 1 home sensor (Q11-360)
detects when the staple head is
fully open (home position)
home
11-361 SH 1 Paper Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
head 1 paper present sensor (Q11-
361) detects when paper is within
the jaws of the stapler
low = no paper
11-362 SH 1 Low Staples Snr LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
head 1 low staples sensor (Q11-
362) detects when staple cartridge
is almost empty
High = almost empty,
low = plentiful staples
11-363 SH 1 Cartridge Sen-
sor
LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
head 1 cartridge present sensor
(Q11-363) detects when a staple
cartridge is installed
High = cartridge
installed, low = cartridge
not installed
11-364 SH 1 Priming Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
head 1 priming sensor (Q11-364)
detects when the front two staples
have been pre-formed (primed)
High = primed, low = not
primed
11-365 SU 1 Safety Gate
Switch
LCSS stapling unit 1 safety gate
switch (S11-365)
High = safety gate
closed
11-367 SU 1 Edge Reg Sen-
sor
LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
unit 1 edge registration sensor
(Q11-367) detects the edge of the
paper is correctly registered
low = no paper
11-370 SU 1 Home Sensor LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM staple
unit 1 home sensor (Q11-370)
detects when the staple head is at
the corner staple position
High = stapler home,
low = stapler not home
11-371 SU 1 Front Index Snr LCSS staple unit 1 front index sen-
sor (Q11-371) detects the index
position of the stapling head
High = at stapling posi-
tion, low = not at sta-
pling position
11-373 Offline Staple SW LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM offline
staple switch (S11-373) detects the
operator command for offline sta-
pling
High = switch pressed,
low = switch not
pressed
11-383 BM Guide Home Snr HCSS BM backstop guide home
sensor (Q11-383) detects when the
backstop is in the home position
home
11-384 BM Tamper1 Home
Snr
HCSS BM tamper 1 home sensor
(Q11-384) detects when the BM
tampers are in the home position
home
11-386 BM Eject Sensor HCSS BM eject sensor (Q11-386)
detects booklets ejecting through
the crease rolls
High = booklet present,
low = no booklet
11-389 BM Bin2 90% Full Snr HCSS BM bin 2 90% full sensor
(Q11-389) detects when bin 2 is
90% or more full
11-391 BM Flapper Sector
Roll Home Sensor
HCSS BM booklet maker flapper
sector roll home sensor (Q11-391)
High = home
11-411 BM SH1 Home Snr HCSS BM staple head 1 home sen-
sor (Q11-411) detects when the sta-
ple head is fully open (home
position)
home
11-412 BM SH1 Staples Low HCSS BM staple head 1 staples
low sensor (Q11-412) detects when
staple cartridge is almost empty
11-413 BM SH2 Home Snr HCSS staple head 2 home sensor
(Q11-413) detects when the staple
head is fully open (home position)
home
11--414 BMSH2 Staples Low HCSS BM staple head 2 staples
low sensor (Q11-412) detects when
staple cartridge is almost empty
11-415 BM Crease Gate
Home
HCSS BM crease roll gate home
gate is fully raised
High = gate raised, low
= gate not raised
11-416 BM Crease Blade
Home
HCSS BM crease blade home sen-
sor (Q11-416) detects when the
crease blade is fully retracted
home
11-417 BM Crease Blade
Travel Lmt
HCSS BM crease blade travel limit
crease blade is fully extended
High = limit made
11-418 BM Blade Mot
Encoder
HCSS BM crease blade motor
encoder sensor (Q11-418) gener-
ates motor speed pulses
wheel, low = gap in
encoder wheel
11-419 BM Crease Mot
Encode
HCSS BM crease roll motor
encoder sensor (Q11-419) gener-
ates motor speed pulses
wheel, low = gap in
encoder wheel
11-421 BM SH Carrier
Closed
HCSS BM staple head carrier
closed sensor (Q11-421) detects
when the carrier is in the closed
position
High = closed, low = not
closed
July 2005
12-300 OCT Level Sensor OCT 90% full sensor (Q12-300)
detects when tray is 90% or more
full.
12-301 OCT Index Sensor OCT index sensor (Q12-301)
detects the offset and home posi-
tion of bin 1
to home
14-100 Carriage Home Sensor Scan carriage home sensor (Q14-
100) detects the home position of
the scan carriage
High - Home, low = not
home
14-310 DADH Angle Sensor Input module angle sensor (Q14-
310) detects the input module at
30% angle for size sensing.
High = input module
lowered, low input mod-
ule raised
14-315 Doc Size Sensor 1 Document size sensor 1 (Q14-310) High = document not
sensed, low = document
sensed
14-320 Doc Size Sensor 2 Document size sensor 2 (Q14-314) High = document not
sensed, low = document
sensed
July 2005
Output Codes
Table 11 Output codes 04
04-010 Main motor Drives the pre-registration, registra-
tion, developer, fuser and paper
output modules.
On/Off. 60 seconds timeout
05-010 DADH feed sole-
noid
DADH feed solenoid (SOL05-010) On/off. 30 seconds timeout
05-020 DADH feed motor DADH feed motor (MOT05-020) On/off. 90 seconds timeout
05-025 DADH feed clutch DADH feed clutch (CL05-025) On/off. Normally linked with
feed motor. 30 seconds time-
out
05-030 DADH CVT motor DADH CVT motor (MOT05-030) On/off. 90 seconds timeout
05-050 DADH duplex
solenoid
DADH duplex solenoid (SOL05-
050)
On/off. 30 seconds timeout
06-020 ROS Motor Run Drives ROS motor at run mode
speed.
06-025 ROS Motor
Standby
Drive ROS motor at standby mode
speed.
07-030 T3 Elevate Motor Energizes the tray 3 elevator motor
(MOT07-030) up.
On/off. Linked to tray 3
home sensor. Only ener-
gize with tray out. 10 sec-
onds timeout
07-040 T4 Elevate Motor Energizes the tray 4 elevate motor
(MOT07-040) up.
home sensor. Only ener-
gies with tray out. 10 sec-
onds timeout
08-010 T1 Feed Motor Energizes the tray 1 feed motor
(MOT 08-010).
home sensor. Paper tray
must be open when motor
energized. 90 seconds time-
out
08-020 T2 Feed Motor Energizes the tray 2 feed motor.
(MOT08-020)
out
08-025 T1+2 Transport
Motor
Energizes the tray 1 and 2 trans-
port motor (MOT08-025)
08-030 T3 Feed Motor Energizes the tray 3feed motor
(MOT08-030)
out
08-040 T4 Feed Motor Energizes the tray 4 feed motor
(MOT08-040)
out
08-045 T3+4 Transport
Motor
Energizes the tray 3 and 4 trans-
08-050 Bypass Feed Sole-
noid
Energizes the bypass feed sole-
noid (SOL08-050)
08-060 Duplex Motor Slow Energizes the duplex motor at sim-
plex speed.
08-062 Duplex Motor Fast Energizes the duplex motor at
duplex speed.
08-070 Registration Clutch Energizes the registration clutch
(CL08-070)
09-010 P/R Motor Energizes the photoreceptor drive
motor (MOT09-010)
09-022 P/R Erase Lamp Energizes the photoreceptor erase
lamp.
09-030 Ozone Fan Energizes the ozone fan. On/off. 90 seconds timeout
09-035 P/R Cooling Fan Energizes the photoreceptor fan Full speed/half speed. 90
seconds timeout
09-036 Duplex cooling
fans enable
Energizes the duplex path cooling
fans
On/off. 90 seconds timeout.
When enabled the fans will
switch on simultaneously
09-040 Dispense Motor Energizes the toner dispense
motor (MOT09-040)
09-045 Cartridge Motor Energizes the toner cartridge
motor (MOT09-045)
July 2005
09-061 Charge Scorotron Energizes the scorotron wire at
nominal drive levels with drives
off.
Linked with Charge grid 09-
062. Normally stacked with
HVPS fault
09-062 Charge Grid Energizes the grid at nominal drive
level with drives off.
Linked with charge
scorotron 09-061
09-063 Transfer Corotron Energizes the transfer corotron
wire on at nominal drive level with
drives off.
Normally stacked with
HVPS fault
09-064 Detack Corotron Energizes the detack wire on. AC
voltage and DC current offset at
nominal drive levels with drives
off.
HVPS fault
09-065 Chute Bias Energizes the bias voltage on at
nominal drive level.
HVPS fault
09-066 Dev Bias Energizes the developer bias volt-
age on at nominal drive level with
drives off.
Stack with HVPS fault
09-071 Scorotron Cleaner
Motor: Forward
Energizes the scorotron cleaning
motor (MOT09-070) in the forward
direction
On/Off. 13 seconds timeout.
Stack with scorotron cleaner
home sensor
09-072 Scorotron Cleaner
Motor: Reverse
Energizes the scorotron cleaning
motor (MOT09-070) in the reverse
direction
Stack with scorotron cleaner
home sensor
10-010 Fuser Web Motor Energizes the fuser web motor
(MOT10-010)
10-030 Invert Mot Fwd
Slow
Energizes the inverter motor
(MOT10-030) forward at process
speed.
10-035 Invert Mot Rev
Slow
Energizes the inverter motor
(MOT10-030) in reverse at pro-
cess speed.
10-040 Invert Mot Rev Dup Energizes the inverter motor
(MOT10-030) in reverse at duplex
speed.
10-045 Inverter Path Sol Energizes the invert path solenoid
(SOL10-045). When de-energized
sheets are fed to the inverter
10-050 Inverter Nip Sol Energizes the inverter nip solenoid
(SOL10-050). When de-energized
the nip is open
10-065 Vac Transport Fan Energizes the vacuum transport
fan in the short paper path assem-
bly
11-000 Transport Motor 1 Energizes the LCSS transport Motor 1,
HCSS and HCSS BM transport motor 1A
and Transport motor 1B
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-001 Transport Motor 2 Energizes the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS
BM transport motor 2
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-002 Diverter Solenoid Energizes the LCSS, HCSS diverter gate
solenoid and HCSS BM upper diverter
solenoid (SOL11-002)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-003 Tamp Mot Front
Home
Energizes the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS
BM front tamper motor (MOT11-003) to
the home position.
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-004 Tamp Mot Rear
Home
BM rear tamper motor (MOT11-004) to
home position
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-005 Tamp Mot Front
Move
BM front tamper motor (MOT11-003) move
inbound.
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-006 Tamp Mot Rear
Move
BM rear tamper motor (MOT11-004) move
inbound.
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-007 Tampers to A4LEF Moves the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM
tampers to A4LEF position.
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-008 Tampers to
8.5x11LEF
Move the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS BM
tampers to 8.5x11 LEF position.
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-009 Tamper Motor
Cycle
Cycles the LCSS tampers in and out until
time-out or stop.
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-010 CC Eject Roll Motor Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM com-
piler carriage eject roll motor (MOT11-010)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-011 CC Hold Solenoid Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM com-
piler carriage tray hold solenoid (SOL11-
011)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-013 CC motor Step Up Energizes the HCSS compiler carriage
elevator motor (MOT11-013)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-014 CC Motor Move Up Energizes the HCSS compiler carriage
elevator motor (MOT11-013) to the upper
limit switch
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
July 2005
11-015 CC Motor Step
Down
Energizes the HCSS compiler carriage
elevator motor (MOT11-013)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-016 CC Motor Move
Down
Energizes the HCSS compiler carriage
elevator motor (MOT11-013) to the lower
limit switch
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-020 Ejector Motor
Home
Energizes the LCSS ejector motor
(MOT11-020) to the home position
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-021 Ejector Motor Move Energizes the LCSS ejector motor
(MOT11-020) to the out position
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-023 Ejector Motor Cycle Energizes the LCSS, HCSS ejector motor
(MOT11-020) cycle routine until timeout or
stop.
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-024 Paddle Roll Motor
Home
BM paddle roll motor (MOT11-024) to the
home position
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-025 Paddle Roll Motor
Run
BM paddle roll motor (MOT11-024) until
timeout or stop
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-026 Paddle Roll Mot
Rev
Energizes the LCSS paddle roll motor
(MOT11-024) in reverse to actuate safety
gate.
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-030 Bin 1 Elev. Mot
Home
BM bin 1 elevate motor (MOT11-030) to
the home position.
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-031 Bin 1 Elev. Mot Up Energizes the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS
BM bin 1 elevate motor (MOT11-030) by
increments up
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-032 Bin 1 Elev. Mot
Down
BM bin 1 elevate motor (MOT11-030) by
increments down
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-033 Bin1 Elev. Mot
Cycle
BM bin 1 elevate motor (MOT11-030) to
cycle bins up/down until time-out or stop.
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout.
11-034 Bin 1 Offset Motor Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM bin 1
offset motor (MOT11-034)
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
Home
Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM bin 2
elevator motor (MOT11-036) to the home
position
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-037 Bin2 Elev. Mot Up Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM bin 2
elevator motor (MOT11-036) by incre-
ments up
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
Down
Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM bin 2
elevator motor (MOT11-036) by incre-
ments down
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-040 Bin2 Offset Motor Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM bin 2
offset motor (MOT11-036)
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-042 Punch Head Move
Home
BM hole punch motor (MOT11-042) to the
home position
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-043 Punch Head Run Energizes the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS
BM hole punch motor (MOT11-042) con-
tinuously
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-050 Staple Head 1
Motor
BM staple head 1 motor (MOT11-050)
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-051 SH 1 Motor Rev.
Home
BM staple head 1 motor (MOT11-050) in
reverse to the home position
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-053 SU 1 Motor For-
ward
BM stapling unit traverse motor (MOT11-
053) increment forward.
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-054 SU 1 Motor
Reverse
053) increment reverse.
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-055 SU1 Index Mot
Cycle
053) cycle routine
On/off. 15 seconds
timeout
11-060 BM Compiler Motor Energizes the HCSS BM paper path trans-
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-061 BM Blade Motor Energizes the HCSS BM crease blade
motor (MOT11-061) cycle
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-062 BM Crease Motor Energizes the HCSS BM crease roll motor
(MOT11-062)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-063 BM Staple Head 1
Motor
Energizes the HCSS BM staple head 1
motor (MOT11-063)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-065 BM Back Stop
Motor
Energizes the HCSS BM backstop motor
(MOT11-065) moves to receive, then sta-
ple, then crease positions
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-066 BM Tamper 1 Motor Energizes the HCSS BM tamper 1 motor
(MOT11-066)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-074 BM Diverter Sole-
noid
Energizes the HCSS BM lower diverter
gate solenoid (SOL11-074)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-076 BM Stack Hold Sol. Energizes the HCSS BM stack hold sole-
noids (SOL11-076) part of back stop
assembly
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-374 Offline Staple LED Energizes the LCSS, HCSS and HCSS
BM offline staple LED
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-390 BM Flapper Sector
Roll Motor
HCSS BM Booklet maker flapper sector
roll motor (MOT11-390)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
July 2005
11-401 BM Crease Roll
Motor
Energizes the HCSS BM crease roll gate
motor (MOT11-401) cycle routine
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-402 BM Mt Conveyor
Drive
Energizes the HCSS BM conveyor belt
drive motor
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-403 BM Staple Hd 2
Motor
Energizes the HCSS BM staple head 2
motor (MOT11-403)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
11-404 BM Crease Gate
Open
Energizes the HCSS BM crease roll gate
motor (MOT11-401) to the open position
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
11-430 Kicker Solenoid Energizes the HCSS and HCSS BM kicker
solenoid (SOL11-430)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
12-005 OCT Motor Energizes the OCT motor On/off. 2 seconds
timeout
14-005 Exposure Lamp Energizes the exposure lamp On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
20-002 Diag. LED 30 Red Switches diagnostic LED 30 red On/off
20-003 Diag. LED 30 green Switches diagnostic LED 30 green On/off
20-010 Sngl Tone 0Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 0Hz on line 1 On/off
20-017 ANSAM Ln1 On/off
20-018 CI Ln1 On/off
20-020 DTMF # Line1 Emits DTMF # on line 1 On/off
20-021 DTMF * Line1 Emits DTMF * on line 1 On/off
20-022 DTMF 0 Line1 Emits DTMF 0 on line 1 On/off
20-023 DTMF 1 Line1 Emits DTMF 1on line 1 On/off
20-032 DTMF A Line1 Emits DTMF A on line 1 On/off
20-033 DTMF B Line1 Emits DTMF B on line 1 On/off
20-034 DTMF C Line1 Emits DTMF C on line 1 On/off
20-035 DTMF D Line1 Emits DTMF D on line 1 On/off
20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1 Emits V.21 300 bps on line 1 On/off
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps on line 1 On/off
20-070 ISDN mode Loopback Applies a loop back of both B channels to the
network
On/off
20-071 ISDN tst mode info 1 Provides INFO 1 signals on both B channels On/off
20-072 ISDN tst mode info 0 Provides INFO 0 signals on both B channels On/off
July 2005
20-073 ISDN PH-ACT-REQ Able to initiate activation procedures (PH-
ACTIVATE REQUEST) primitive
On/off
20-074 ISDN LED 10/18 Red Switches ISDN LED 10/18 red On/off
20-075 ISDN LED 10/18 Grn Switches ISDN LED 10/18 green On/off
20-076 ISDN line relay Switches SDN line relay On/off
20-087 ANSAM Ln2 - On/off
20-088 CI Ln2 - On/off
20-090 DTMF # Line2 Emits DTMF # on line 2 On/off
20-091 DTMF * Line2 Emits DTMF * on line 2 On/off
20-093 DTMF 1 Line2 Emits DTMF 1on line 2 On/off
20-102 DTMF A Line2 Emits DTMF A on line 2 On/off
20-103 DTMF B Line2 Emits DTMF B on line 2 On/off
20-104 DTMF C Line2 Emits DTMF C on line 2 On/off
20-105 DTMF D Line2 Emits DTMF D on line 2 On/off
July 2005
dC502 DADH Width Guide Calibration Procedure
Purpose
To recalibrate the DADH width guides, so that the correct document size can be determined
from the analogue width guide potentiometer. Refer to dC604 for registration setup.
Calibration is only necessary if:
The values in the image processor NVM have not been set and are still zero.
A new component has been installed to the DADH input tray.
The characteristics of the potentiometer have changed.
If the calibration routine is not performed the image processor NVM values will be zero. This
will force the DADH to use the average values programmed into DADH flash memory during
manufacture.
Description
An A4 LEF or 8.5 x 11 LEF document is placed in the DADH input tray and the width guides
adjusted to the same width as the document. The A to D value (maximum to minimum width in
mm) is derived from the width guide potentiometer and the process is repeated for an A5 SEF
or 8.5 x 5.5 SEF size document.
The two calibration values are stored in the image processors NVM. They are passed to the
DADH together with the market paper size setting whenever a Reset command is given (this
instructs the DADH to set all the output ports to their default off condition and to provide an
update of any NVM values including the cpm rate). If the image processor NVM values are
within a valid range (Table 1) the DADH will use the two values to establish a linear equation
that can be used to calculate (in mm) all the other valid document sizes.
Procedure
2. Select, Diagnostics Routines, Copier Routines, dC 502 DADH Width Calibration.
3. Select and touch the appropriate button to select A4 or 8.5 x 11.
NOTE: The market paper size setting will default the document size buttons to the rele-
vant ISO or USA document sizes. Selection of either button will default all the displayed
document sizes.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Touch Exit when routine is completed.
Table 1 DADH width range
Document size Valid range Nominal
A5 SEF 1 to 45 31
A4 LEF 190 to 237 226
5.5 x 8.5 SEF 1 to 45 17
8.5 x 11 LEF 190 to 237 203
July 2005
dC604 Registration Setup Procedure
Description
The dC604 routine places an internal generated scaled test pattern on the paper.
NOTE: ADJ 8.2 Registration Setup contains only a reference to this diagnostic procedure.
Purpose
To measure and adjust image to paper registration using the four routines:
1. IOT Registration side 1 - simplex lead and top edge registration adjustment.
2. IOT Registration Side 2 (duplex) - duplex lead and top edge registration adjustment.
3. Scanner Registration - document glass lead and top edge registration adjustment.
4. DADH Registration - constant velocity transport (CVT) lead edge and centre registration
adjustment. Refer to dC502 DADH Width Guide Calibration.
NOTE: During the scanner and the DADH registration procedures a border erase is
applied to the copied test patterns. Since the test pattern has been designed for both mar-
kets regions, the size of the edge deletion will depend on the paper size:
For A4 LEF paper, all edges have a 10mm deletion, but the bottom edge (Zone C on
Figure 1) will measure 28mm from the edge of the paper.
For 8.5 x 11 LEF paper, all edges have a 10mm deletion, but the trail edge (Zone B
on Figure 1) will measure 16mm from the edge of the paper.
Initial Action
Ensure that 8.5 x 11 or A4 LEF paper is loaded in tray 1.
Ensure that the ROS is secured and positioned correctly. Check that the ROS securing
screw at the front of the machine is present and secure, refer to REP 6.1.
Procedure
NOTE: Always perform the IOT Registration Side 1 adjustments before performing any other
registration adjustment, as the IOT Registration Side 1 adjustment affects the others.
2. Select, Diagnostics Routines, then select Copier Routines, then select dC604 Registra-
tion Setup.
3. Select Image Output Terminal Registration Side 1, then select All Trays, then select Print
Test Samples and follow the UI screen prompts.
NOTE: Do not select individual trays unless directed by the documentation.
a. Compare the zones A and D on the test samples, with those in Figure 2.
b. Adjust the registration, enter the number on the scale at the edge of the paper.
For example. If the top edge of the paper aligns with the 20mm mark on zone A (20
mm indicates correct IOT registration, Figure 2) then enter 20mm. If the top edge
aligned with the 15mm mark then enter 15mm.
4. Select Image Output Terminal Registration Side 2, then select All Trays, then select Print
Test Samples and follow the UI screen prompts.
5. Select Scanner Registration and follow the UI screen prompts.
a. The first three copies out will be the IOT test samples, one of which will be used as
an original to make the scanner test samples.
NOTE: To obtain the correct scanner registration. Check that the registration on the
IOT test samples is correct, Figure 2. If not correct then return to step 3.
b. Place one of the IOT test sample on the platen glass.
c. Compare the zones A and D on the scanner test samples, with those in Figure 3.
d. Adjust the registration, enter the number at the point where the scale is deleted.
For example. If the top of the zone A scale is deleted at the 10mm mark (10mm indi-
cates the correct scanner registration, Figure 3) then enter 10. If the top of the zone
A scale is deleted at the 5mm mark then enter 5.
6. Select Document Handler Registration and follow the UI screen prompts.
a. The first three copies out will be IOT test samples which will be used as originals to
make the DADH test samples.
NOTE: To obtain the correct DADH registration. Check that the registration on IOT
test samples is correct, Figure 2. If not correct then return to step 3.
b. Place the IOT test samples in the DADH.
c. Compare the zones A and D on the DADH test samples, with those in Figure 3.
d. Adjust the registration, enter the number at the point where the scale is deleted.
For example. If the top of the zone A scale is deleted at the 10mm mark (10mm indi-
cates correct DADH registration, Figure 3) then enter 10mm. If the top of the zone A
scale is deleted at the 5mm mark then enter 5mm.
Place the IOT test samples in the DADH to enable the Save option.
7. If the correct registration can not be obtained because the registration scales are out of
range or off the page. Enter dC132 NVM Initialization, select Machine Variable NVM and
initialize. This will reset all of the registration values to default, return to step 3, complete
all four routines.
8. Take samples from each tray using the individual tray select button and check the lead
edge and top edge registration is within specification, Figure 2. If the top edge registration
is not correct on individual trays then go to step 9.
9. The individual trays can be adjusted to compensate for any mechanical variation between
the trays, which may cause an error in the top edge registration.
The individual tray top edge has an adjustment range of +/-10mm with increments of
0.5mm. When saved, the adjustment will update the NVM offset value for the specific tray.
To adjust the top edge registration on individual trays perform the following:
a. Enter diagnostics GP 1. Select, Diagnostics Routines / Copier Routines / dC 604
Registration Setup
b. Select Image Output Terminal Registration Side 1 / select the individual tray / Print
Test Samples.
NOTE: If the top edge of the paper aligns above the 20mm mark on zone A i.e. at
22mm. Then select +2mm to align the top edge of the paper with the 20mm mark on
zone A. If the top edge of the paper aligns with the 15mm mark on zone A. Then
select -5mm to align the top edge of the paper with the 20mm mark on zone A.
Make the adjustments, then press Print Test Samples. When the top edge of the
paper aligns with the 20mm mark on zone A, the registration is correct, Figure 2.
Press Save and repeat the procedure as necessary for the other trays.
c. Select Image Output Terminal Registration Side 2 and repeat the above procedure
as necessary.
July 2005
10. Make copies of the test pattern 82E2010 or 82E2020 from the DADH and document glass
to check for skew. Refer to IQS 5 Skew. Use internal test prints 16 or 17 to check printer
skew. Refer to IQS 5 Skew.
11. Save the new settings to the machine resident diskette, GP 5.
Figure 1 Registration test pattern
Figure 2 IOT registration
Top edge registration on the 20mm line
Lead edge registration on the 20mm line
July 2005
Figure 3 Scanner and DADH registration
Top edge registration on the 10mm line
Lead edge registration on the 10mm line
Top edge of the paper
Lead edge of the paper
July 2005
dC606 Internal Print Test Patterns
Purpose
To print internal test patterns for image quality analysis.
Procedure
NOTE: Refer to IQ1 for information on the test patterns.
2. Enter diagnostics Routines
3. Enter Other Routines.
4. Enter dC 606 Print Test Patterns.
5. Select Image Quality Test Patterns 1 - 19.
6. Select the Features, 1 or 2 sided and paper size.
NOTE: Two sided test patters are always backed with test pattern 16, quadrille.
7. Select the Format, Label on or off and Border on or off.
8. Select Saved.
9. Touch the Start Test.
10. Press Exit to return to the main diagnostic menu; select another feature or exit diagnos-
tics.
NOTE: The system administrator and key operator cannot generate print test patterns 4, 6, 7
or 8.
dC640 Video Path Diagnostics
Purpose
To verify the integrity of the video path in the machine. It will enable the CSE to verify if an
image quality problem is caused by electronic hardware.
Description
WARNING
1. Scanner Video Test. This test will validate the scanner PWB and the video path between
the scanner module and the image processor calibration hardware.
2. Network Controller / Image Processor Test. This test is not implemented. To exit an
attempt, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
Procedure
2. Select Diagnostics Routines, Copier Routines, dC 640 Video Path Diagnostics. The Video
Path Diagnostics window will display.
3. Select the Scanner Video Test and follow the screen instructions.
4. If the test fails, go to the correct checkout for the speed of the machine:
(32-55 ppm). Check in the sequence that follows:
a. The harness from the Image processing PWB to CCD PWB, PJ110 to PJ125, PL
14.25 Item 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram 8.
b. The harness from the Power distribution PWB to scanner PWB, PJ135 to PJ455 and
PJ450, PL 14.25 Item 13. Refer to Wiring Diagram 10.
c. Install new components as necessary:
Image processing PWB, PL 3.20 Item 3.
Scanner complete assembly, PL 14.20 Item 1.
The CCD and PWB cannot be replaced separately without disturbing the opti-
cal alignment.
(65-75 ppm). Check in the sequence that follows:
a. The harness from the Image processing PWB to scanner PWB, PJ225 to PJ127 and
PJ226 to PJ125, PL 14.16 Item 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram 9
b. The harness from the Power distribution PWB to scanner PWB, PJ135 to PJ455 and
PJ450, PL 14.16 Item 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram 10.
c. Install new components as necessary:
Image processing PWB, PL 3.10 Item 3.
Scanner PWB, PL 14.16 Item 8.
July 2005
dC905 TC Sensor Calibration
Purpose
To calibrate and setup the Toner Concentration Sensor. This setup is required at manufacture
and after installing a new developer module, (32-55 ppm) PL 9.17 Item 2, (65-75 ppm) PL 9.15
Item 2.
Description
WARNING
The TC sensor, located in the bottom of the developer housing, is used in the process control
loop to help maintain the concentration of toner in the developer tank at the optimal level.
The TC sensor needs to be calibrated by adjusting the sensor output to the required target
value for a new developer toner concentration. The sensor output voltage can be adjusted to
the correct level by varying the control voltage applied to the sensor.
The output of the sensor depends on the:
Magnetic properties of the developer material (this is a fixed value).
Applied control voltage.
Developer temperature.
Humidity.
Procedure
2. Select Diagnostics Routines, Copier Routines, dC 905 TC Sensor Calibration.
3. Touch the Start button to start the routine, and follow the on screen instructions.
Message displayed Only run this routine when a new developer package has been
installed
Message displayed Make sure you have cammed on the developer before starting
this routine.
The components listed will energize:
Photoreceptor drive motor.
Photoreceptor erase lamp.
Charge scorotron and charge grid.
Developer bias voltage.
Main drive motor (to rotate the developer).
4. If the setup fails, a TC Sensor Setup Routine Failed message appears, go to 09-360, 09-
361, 09-362, 09-363 TC Sensor Failure RAP.
July 2005
GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations
Refer to Table 1.
Where possible unit designations as appear in ISO 1000 (International Organization for Stan-
dardization) and Xerox Standard MN2-905 have been used. All measurement appear in ISO
units followed by any conversion in brackets e.g.; 22.5 mm (0.885 inches)
Table 1
Term Description
AAA Authentication, Authorisation and Accounting
ABS Automatic Background Suppression. ABSolute
ACK Acknowledge
ADF Automatic Document Feeder
ADU Automatic Duplexing Unit
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AHA Advanced Hardware Architecture
AMCV Average Monthly Copy Volume
AMF Advanced Multi Function device
AMPV Average Monthly Print Volume
AMR Automatic Meter Read
AMS Automatic Magnification Selection
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API Application Programming Interface
APS Auto Paper Selection
ARP Address Resolution Protocol. Converts an IP address to a MAC address.
See RARP.
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASP Authorized Service Provider
ASTM American Standard Test Method
ATPD Across The Process Direction
AZAP Any Zone Any Paper
B Bels (applies to sound power level units)
B (A) Bels (A weighted) (applies to sound power level units)
B (A) I Bels (A weighted) Impulse response (applies to sound power level units)
BABT British Approvals Board for Tele-Communication
BAM Bundes Anstalt fur Materialprufung
BEUI BIOS Extended User Interface
Bluetooth Wireless local area network
BM Booklet Maker
BMF Basic Multi Function device
BootP Boot Protocol. AN IP protocol for automatically assigning IP addresses.
bps Bits per second
BS Behavior Specification
BT Busy Tone
C Celsius
CAT Customer Admin Tool
CB Certification Bodies
CC Copy Centre
CCA Cenelec Certification Agreement
CCA Customer Call Assistance
CCD Charged Coupled Device
CCITT Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique
CCR Change Control Request
CD Copy Darker. A copy density setting
CD-ROM Compact Disk - Read Only Memory
CDDU Controller and Drivers Delivery Unit
CDDUW Controller and Drivers Delivery Unit - West Coast
CDS Charge - deficient spot. A photoconductor defect that as a very small
black spot (image quality parameter).
CED Called Station Identification
CEH&S Corporate Environmental Heath and Safety
CentreWare CentreWare internet services is the embedded HTTP server application
that is available on network enabled machines. It enables access to print-
ing, faxing and scanning over the internet.
CFR Confirmation To Receive
CISPR Comite International Special des Perturbations
CID Command Identification
CIG Calling Subscriber Identification
CIS Contact Image Sensor
CL Copy Lighter. A copy density setting
Click Charge Charge by copy/print rate
COD Customer Operating Division
CPHI Calls Per Hundred Installs
cpm Copies per minute
CQ Copy Quality
CR Change Request
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit
CRUM Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor
CSE Customer Service Engineer
CSF Call Service Fault
CSMS Customer Satisfaction Management System
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
Customer Drivers Customer drivers are specially developed generally made with a driver
toolkit. These drivers can provide a full set of features for Xerox printers.
In the past, customers drivers have been provided for all major operating
systems. A customer print driver is costly to develop, and does not used
standard operating system components. For this reason, PPD / GPD
solutions will be used in future whenever possible.
CTC Continue To Correct
CTF Contrast Transfer Function
CTR Response For Continue To Correct
CTS Clear To Send
CVT Constant Velocity Transport
CWW CentreWare Web
DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (feeds documents to a different
stack)
DADH Duplex Automatic Document Handler (feeds documents to bottom of
existing feed stack)
DB Database
dB Decibel (applies to sound pressure level units)
dB(A) Decibels (A weighted) (applies to sound pressure level units)
dB(A)I Decibels (A weighted) Impulse response (applies to sound pressure level
units)
dC Diagnostic code
DC Digital Copier
DC Device Controller, generic term for any module that acts as a image han-
dling device e.g., SIP. Digital Copier
DC Direct Current
DC + Fax Digital Copier with embedded Fax card
DCN Disconnect
DCS Digital Command Signal
DDF Device Description File
DHCP Dynamic Host Config Protocol (similar to BootP)
DIMM Dual In Line Memory Module
DIN Deutches Institute fur Normung
DLM Dynamically Loadable Module
DMO-E Developing Markets Operations East (was part of RX)
DMO-W Developing Markets Operations West (was part of ACO)
DOS Disk Operating Systems
DPHM Defects Per Hundred Machines
DIS Digital Identification Signal
DMA Direct Memory Access
DMO Developing Markets Operations
dpi Dots per inch
Table 1
Term Description
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRS Drum to Roll Spacing
DSR Data Set Ready
DST Daylight Saving Time
DT Dial Tone
DTC Digital Transmit Command
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
DU Density Units
Dust Off Routine to return machine to pre-install state
EAA Electron Auditron Administrator
EBS Electronic Billing Service
EC European Community
ECE External Customer Engagement
ECM Error Correction Mode. Electronic Counter Measure
EEC European Economic Community
EET Edge Enhancement Technology
EHS Environmental Health and Safety
ELOG Electronic Log
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
Embedded Fax A fax system included in a system device
EME Electromagnetic Emission
EN European Norm
EOL End Of Line
EOM End Of Message
EOP End Of Procedure
EOR End Of Retransmission
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPC Electronic Page Collation (memory dedicated to temporary retention of
images captured from the scanner and network controller)
EPROM Erasable / Programmable Read Only Memory
EP-SV Electronic Partnership Supervisor (kit)
ERR End Retransmission Response
ERU Engineer Replaceable Unit
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESG European Solutions Group
ESS Electronic Sub-System. For this machine use NC
ETP Electronic Test Pattern
EU European Union
EUR Europe
FAX Facsimile
FCC Federal Communications Commission
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
FCD Facsimile Coded Data
FCS Facsimile Checking Sequence
FCOT First Copy Out Time
FD Functional Description
FER Feature Enhancement Request
FID Foreign Interface Device
FIF Facsimile Information Field
FIFO First In First Out
FireWire IEEE 1349. High speed serial communications system, comprising hard-
ware plus protocol. Operates at 100, 200 or 400 Mbits/s, with 800 Mbits/s
under development. See USB and RS-232
firmware Software in a chip which cannot be altered
FLASH On board erasable and reprogrammable non volatile memory
FOIP FAX Over Internet Protocol
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FPOT First Print Out Time
FRU Fuser Replacement Unit
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
FSMA Field Service Maintenance Agreement
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FTT Failure To Train
FX Fuji Xerox
G3 Group 3
GC Group Command
GDI Graphical Display Interface
GI Group Identification
GLCD Graphic Liquid Crystal Display
GND Ground
GPD Minidrivers A Generic Printer Description file has a function similar to PPD files. This
format was developed by Microsoft to provide a simple method to
develop drivers for non-postScript printers. Standard GPD minidrivers
share the same lamentations as the PPD minidrivers, but they too can be
enhanced using plug-ins. GPD Minidrivers are a new technology intro-
duced for Windows 2000 and they will also be supported Windows NT 4.
In Windows 95/98, a similar, but less powerful unidriver format was
used.
GS German safety
gsm Grams per square metre
GUI Graphics User Interface
HC High Capacity
HCF High Capacity Feeder
HCSS High Capacity Stapler Stacker (3K)
Table 1
Term Description
HCSS BM High Capacity Stapler Stacker Booklet Maker
HDD Hard Disk Drive
HDLC High Level Data Link Control
HFLEN High - Frequency (random) Line - Edge Noise. image quality metric.
HFSI High Frequency Service Intervals
HLD High Level Design. A document that defines the software high level
design.
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HUI Hybrid User Interface
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply
Hz Hertz
IB InBoard
I2C-bus Inter Integrated Circuit bus. This provides a simple bidirectional 2-wire
bus for efficient inter-IC control. All I2C-bus compatible devices incorpo-
rate an interface which allows them to communicate directly with each
other via the I2C-bus.
ICAT Internal Customer Acceptance Test
ICE Internal Customer Engagement
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers
IEEE 1284 Parallel port communication
IETF Internal Engineering Task Force
IFAX Internet Fax
IIT Image Input Terminal
IM Interim Maintenance
Intlk Interlock
IOT Image Output Terminal
IOTC Image Output Terminal Controller (IOT PWB, LVPS and HVPS). Some-
times referred to as the Power and Control Assembly.
IP Internet Protocol
IPA Image Processing Accelerator. Used by the machine scanning services
to convert scanned images to a standard format e.g. for scan to file /
scan to E-mail for network transmission.
IPM Incremental Preventative Maintenance
IPM Images per minute
IPP Internet Printing Protocol
IPS Image Processing Service
IPS1 Image Processing System
IPX Internetwork Protocol eXchange
IQ Image Quality
IR Infra Red
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network / International Standard Data Net-
work
ISIL Inter and Side Image Lamp
ISO International Standards Organisation
ITP Internal Test Pattern
ITTCC International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
ITU -T International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunication
JBA Job Based Accounting (Network Accounting)
JBIG Joint Bi-Level Image Experts Group file interchange format
jitter A line of missing or corrupted information in the fast scan direction.
JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group file interchange format
kg kilogram
kHz kilohertz
Kill All Routine to return all NVM, including protected NVM, to a virgin state.
Factory use only
KO Key Operator
LAA Local Area Addressing
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCDM Liquid Crystal Display Module
LCS Line Conditioning Signal
LCSS Low Capacity Stapler Stacker
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (allows sharing of corporate
phone book information)
LE Lead edge
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEF Long Edge Feed
LEISUS Low End Interface Unsolicited Status-B
LG Legal
LOA Load Object Attributes
lpi Lines per inch
LSI Large Scale Integration
LT Letter
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
Lwr Lower
LUI Local user Interface
m metre
MAC Address Media Access Code. This is the basic, unique identifier of a networked
device. An incoming message is analysed and an address in another
form, such as an IP address, is resolved by a lookup table to a MAC
address. The message is then directed to, and accepted by the equip-
ment thus identified. It is the burnt-in, hardware address of a NIC.
Table 1
Term Description
MB Megabyte (one MB = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes). Mail Box
Mb Mega bit (one million bits)
MCF Message Confirmation
MF Multifunction
MFLEN Mid - Frequency (random) Lines - Edge Noise
MH Modified Huffman
MIB Machine Information Block. SNMP database element
MJ Modular Jack
mm millimetre
MMC Microsoft Management Console
MMR Modified Modified Read compression
MN Multi - National
Modem MOdulator/DEModulator. Hardware unit that converts the one and zero
binary values from the computer to two frequencies for transmission over
the public telephone network (modulation). It also converts the two fre-
quencies received from the telephone network to the binary values for
the computer (demodulation).
Moire Image quality defect caused by interference between patterned originals
and the digital imaging process. Moire patterns are repetitive and visible
as bands, plaids or other texture.
MPS Multi-Page Signal
MR Modified Read compression
MRD Machine Resident Diskette
MRC Modified Read Compression
MSG Management Steering Group
ms millisecond
MSI Multi-Sheet Inserter
MSO Mixed Size Originals
MX Modi Xerox
N Newton
NASG-N North American Solutions Group (equivalent to XCI)
NASG-S North American Solutions Group (equivalent to USCO)
nC nanoCoulomb
NC Network Controller (equivalent to ESS).
NC Normal Contrast. Copy contrast setting
NCR No Copying Required
NCU Network Control Unit
NDS NetWare Domain Services or Novell Directory Services
NDS Context NetWare Domain Services Context
NDS Tree NetWare Domain Services Tree
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface. A network device driver or transport
protocol that is the transport driver supplied with LAN Manager. It can
bind with as many as eight media access control drivers.
NetBIOS Network Basic Input / Output System. Software developed by IBM that
provides the interface between the PC operating system, the I?O bus,
and the network. Since its design, NetBIOS has become a de facto stan-
dard.
NGI Next Generation Infrastructure (new files and mail servers)
NIC Network Interface Card. Converts the data to a form suitable for trans-
mission and reception. Uses ARP and RARP.
Nm Newton metre
NOHAD Noise, Ozone, Heat, Airflow and Dust
NP Printer configuration
NS Normal Sharpness. Copy sharpness setting
NSC Non-Standard Facilities Command
NSF Non-Standard Facilities
NSS Non-Standard Set-Up
NSSD Network. The SESS and CentreWare development team based in Roch-
ester NY. This group is now named CDDU.
NVM Non-Volatile Memory
OA Open Architecture
OB Out Board
OCT Offsetting Catch Tray
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OGM On Going Maintenance
OpCo Operating Company
OSA Online support Assistant
OSCG Office Systems Component Group
P/R Photoreceptor
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PC Fax Personal Computer Fax
PCI Peripheral Component Interface
PCI Personal Computer Interface
PCL Printer Control Language
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
PD Process Direction
PDF Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format
PDL Page Description Language
PDT Product Delivery Team
Pels Picture Data (Pixel)
PFM Paper Feed Module
Table 1
Term Description
PHI per Hundred Installs
PIN Procedural Interrupt Negative
PIN Personal Identification Language
ping Packet InterNet Groper. Tool to test connections between nodes by send-
ing and returning test data.
PIP Procedural Interrupt Positive
PJL Printed Job Language. Hewlett Packard page description language.
PMC Programme Management Committee
POPO Power Off Power On
POO or P of O Principles of Operation
POST Power On Self Test
PPC Power PC. A EPROM manufacturer
PPD Postscipt Printer Description. A PPD file is a simple formatted text file
that contains a description of the printers features and the corresponding
PostScipt code needed to activate each feature. Apple LaserWrite driv-
ers and application programs such as Adobe PageMaker can use PPD
files. With a OOD file, many of the printing features of a network printer
can be made available to users. However advanced features such as
LAN Fax, Accounting and Exception Page Programming cannot be pro-
vided.
PPD Minidrivers PPD minidrivers are available in Windows operating systems (from Win-
dows 95 onwards). With these, a Xerox - supplied PPD file is used in
conjunction with an operating system supplied driver ton create a Post-
Script driver tailored for a specific device. In windows 95/98, a driver pro-
vided by this method has lamentations and not all devices features can
be made available to the user. With Windows NT 4 and Windows 2000, it
is possible to make more features available by using a user interface ren-
dering plug - in. In this document, if the driver is to be provided with If no
plug-ins are provided, then it is called a standard minidriver.
PPHI Problems Per Hundred Installs
ppm Prints per minute / Parts Per Million
PPR Partial page Request
pps Partial Page Signal / pulses per second
PPS Product Performance Specification
PR Photo-Receptor
PRI-EOM Procedure Interrupt-EOM
PRI-EOP Procedure Interrupt-EOP
PRI-MPS Procedure Interrupt-MPS
PSM1 Power Save Mode 1 (low power mode)
PSM 3 Power Save Mode 3 (sleep mode)
PS Post Script
PSTN Private Switched Telephone Network
PSW Portable Service Workstation
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
PTT Post, Telephone, Telegraph (national public utilities)
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
PVT Product Verification Test
PWB Printed Wiring Board
PWS Portable Work Station
QIT Quality Improvement Team
RAM Random Access Memory
RARP Reverse Address Resolution. Reverse of ARP. Converts a MAC address
to an IP address. The document centre resolves its address using RARP.
See also MAC, NIC and ARP.
RBT Ring Back Tone
RCA Remote Customer Assistance
RDT Remote Data Transfer
R/E Reduction / Enlargement
REN Ringer Equivalence Number
RFC Request for comment. An IETF standard reference.
RPC Remote Procedure Call
RH Relative humidity
RIC Remote Interactive Communications
RIS Raster Input Scanner
Riser PWB A card that increases the number of PCI slots.
RJ 45 Phone type network connector
RM Requirements Management
RMS Root Mean Square (AC value)
RNR Receive Not Ready
RO Regional Operations
RNR Receive Not Ready
ROS Raster Output Scanner
RR Receive Ready
RRB Requirements Review Board
RS-232, RS-423,
RS-422, RS-485
Series of standards for serial communication of data by wire. RS-232
operates at 20 kbits/s, RS-423 operates at 100 kbits/s, RS-422 and RS-
485 operate at 10 Mbits / s. See FireWire and USB.
RTN Retrain Negative
RTP Retrain Positive
RTS Request To Send
Rx Receive
SA Systems Administration
SAD Solid Area Density
SAKO Systems Administration Key Operator
Table 1
Term Description
SAP Service Advertising Protocol. a network device will broadcast its capabili-
ties onto the network at a defined intervals.
SAF Safety
SAP Service Advertising Protocol
SAR Semi-Active Retard feeder
SCD Software Compatibility Database
SCM Software Configuration Management
SCN Specification Change Notice
SCR Software Change Request
SCSI Small computer Systems Interface
SCT Simple Catch Tray
S/D Shut Down
SDK Software Development Kit
SDP Software Development Plan
SDR Shut Down Rate
SDRAM Static Dynamic Remote Access Memory
Server Fax A fax system that uses a remote Fax server. Faxes transmit as a Scan to
File job sent to the server. Fax receive as print jobs submitted to the Con-
nection Device.
SEF Short Edge Feed
SESS Strategic Electronic Sub-System
SIM Scanner Input Module
SIP Scanning and Image Processing
SIR Standard Image Reduction
Sixth Sense A single device and group management tool
SLP Service Location Protocol (finds servers)
SM Scheduled Maintenance
SMB Server Message Block. Microsoft Server / Client Communications proto-
col
SMP1 Service Maintenance Pack 1 (contains a software package)
SPAR Software Problem Action Request
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
Snr Sensor
SOD System Operating Description
SPL Sound Pressure Level
SPP Short Paper Path
spi Spots per inch
SPID Service Profile Identification
SQA Software Quality Assurance
SR Service Representative
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
SRC Software Requirements
SS or S/S Sub System
ST System Terminal Device. Multi-functional device as defined by Energy
Star (includes DC / NC and DC / NC / Fax)
STP Standard Test Pattern
SW Switch
SW or S/W Software
SWL Sound Power Level
system kernel Minimal operating system
T & M Time and Materials
TAR Take away Roll
TBC To Be Confirmed
TBD To Be Defined
TCP / IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
TE Trail Edge
Template A collection of Scan to File attributes that can be conveniently re-used.
TC Toner Concentration
TCF Training Check Field
TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
TIFF FX TIFF Fax eXtended
TIFFX Tagged Image File Format - for internet FAX
TP Test Point
TPM Technical Programme Manager
Transmissive LCD Liquid Crystal Display lit from the back
TRC Toner Reproduction Curve
TRN Train
TSH Technical Service Hours
TSI Transmit Subscriber Identification
TTY Teletype Terminal
TUI Textual User Interface
Tx Transmit
UGD An upgrade file, i.e. filename.ugd
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UI User Interface (display screen)
UK United Kingdom
UM Unscheduled Maintenance
UMR Unscheduled Maintenance Rate
URL Universal Resource Locator
Table 1
Term Description
USB Universal Serial Bus.
High speed successor to parallel port for local device communications.
Operates at 12 Mbits / s. See FireWire and RS-232.
USCO United States Customer Operations
UTP Unsheilded Twisted Pair
V.17 / V.29 / V.34 Modem standards
VALO Value Added Logistic Organisation
VAR Value Added Reseller
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
VGA Video Graphics Array
VOIP Voice Over Internet Protocol
WC WorkCentre
WC + PS WorkCentre + PostScript print drivers
WCP WorkCentre Pro
WEB UI CentreWare Internet Services
WINS Window Internet Name Service
XAP Xerox Asia Pacific
XCL Xerox Canada Limited
XCMI Xerox Common Management Interface
XE Xerox Europe
XI Xerox Initiated
XL Xerox Limited
XLA Xerox Latin America
XOG Xerox Office Group
XRU Xerographic Replacement Unit
XSA Xerox Standard Accounting
XUL Xerox Unique Login enables use of the xerox corporate directory
Table 1
Term Description
July 2005
July 2005
6-187 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) Tags
Tags
Purpose
To provide a list of all the tag numbers used together with a description of each of the machine
modifications.
Description
Each modification to the system is assigned a unique tag number. This section of the service
documentation contains a listing and brief description of all change tags. It also references the
diagnostic routine, dC111 Tag Matrix, used to access, enter, store and retrieve hardware and
software upgrade information contained in the machine's NVM.
Change tags listed in this section are listed by machine module. The module to which the tag
relates is identified by the tag prefix letter, for example; Tag F048 applies to the Finisher - mod-
ule. The module prefixes are:
Processor module - 001 to 250 (no prefix).
DADH module - D001 to D050.
Finisher (LCSS) module - F001 to F050.
Finisher (HCSS) module - H001 to H050.
Finisher (HCSS BM) module - B001 to B050.
Network controller - N001 to N050
Fax - X001 to X050.
Tag Information
Information that may be included with each tag item is as follows:
Tag - gives the control number for the tag.
Class - gives the classification codes as listed in Table 1.
Use - indicates the multinational operating markets affected by the modification.
Manufacturing Serial Number - gives the serial number of the factory built machines with
the modification installed.
Purpose - gives a brief description of the modification.
Name - gives the name of the part or modification.
Kit Number - gives the part number of the kit or part required to install the modification.
Reference or Parts List On - indicates the parts list where the kit or modification part can
be found.
Mod / Tag Plate Location
The Processor module. Open the front door and the Mod / Tag plate is located on the left side
of the main machine frame.
The DADH module. Lift up the DADH and the Mod / Tag plate is located on the rear of the
DADH.
The 1K LSCSS module. Undock the 1K LCSS and the Mod / Tag plate is located on the dock-
ing plate.
The 2K LCSS module. Undock the LCSS and the Mod / Tag plate is located in the base pan of
the LCSS.
The HCSS module. Undock the HCSS and the Mod / Tag plate is located on the metal panel
under the docking latch.
The HCSSBM module. Undock the HCSSBM and the Mod / Tag plate is located on the metal
panel under the docking latch.
The Network controller. Remove the network controller from the machine and the Mod / Tag
plate is located on the front cage, PL 16.10 Item 6.
Embedded Fax. The Mod / Tag plate is located on the safety cover, PL 20.10 Item 1.
Classification Codes
The Class or Classification code can be explained as follows:
Table 1 Classification codes
NASG
code
XE
code Description
- 1 Safety: Install this tag immediately.
M 2 Mandatory: Install this tag at the next opportunity.
R 3 Repair: Install this tag as a repair, at the failure of a component.
O 4 Optional: Install as a customer option or a field engineering decision.
S 4 Situational: Install as the situation demands.
N 5 Manufacturing: Cannot be installed in the field.
6 Refurbishing only.
July 2005
6-188 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) Processor Tags, DADH Tags
Processor Tags
TAG: 002
CLASS: 4
NAME: Gravity Finger it
PURPOSE: To change the gravity finger on the inverter assembly to improve the paper feed
when using 8.5 inch paper
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON: (32-55 ppm) PL 10.14, (65-75) PL 10.12.
TAG: 003
CLASS: 4
NAME: HCF Multifeed Kit
PURPOSE: To add two modified retard clips to each tray to prevent multifeeds.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON: PL 7.15 Item 25
TAG: 004
CLASS: 4
NAME: Tray 1 and Tray 2 multifeed Kit
PURPOSE: To reduce multifeeds and to add a ramp on the end of the feeder to prevent
damage to the feeder.
KIT NUMBER:
DADH Tags
TAG: None issued
CLASS: 5
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON: XX
July 2005
Finisher (2K LCSS) Tags
TAG: F001
CLASS: 5
NAME: New LCSS graphic labels
PURPOSE: New jam clearance instructions
KIT NUMBER: None
PARTS LIST ON: None
TAG: F002
CLASS: 5
NAME: LCSS tamper arms and exit sensor timing
PURPOSE: To improve stacking performance
KIT NUMBER: None
PARTS LIST ON: PL 11.10, PL 11.16, PL 11.18
TAG: F003
CLASS: 5
NAME: LCSS entry guide cover change
PURPOSE: Improve performance
KIT NUMBER: None
TAG: F004
CLASS: 5
NAME: LCSS noise reduction kit
PURPOSE: Reduction of operational noises
KIT NUMBER: None
PARTS LIST ON: PL 11.16, PL 11.23
TAG: F005
CLASS: 5
NAME: LCSS elevator motor encoder sensor.
PURPOSE: A new sensor with an improved response time.
KIT NUMBER: None
TAG: F006
CLASS: 4
NAME: LCSS hole punch field repair kit.
PURPOSE: To implement an adjustment for the LCSS hole punch.
KIT NUMBER: 604K21620
PARTS LIST ON: PL 11.6
TAG: F007
CLASS: 5
NAME: LCSS rear frame cutout modified.
PURPOSE: Change to the cutout in the rear frame to accommodate all configurations of
hole punches
KIT NUMBER: -
PARTS LIST ON: -
TAG: F008
CLASS: 4
NAME: LCSS legal 2 hole enable kit.
PURPOSE: For use on machines with TAG F007 installed. TAG F008 moves the position of
the punch sensor Q11-110. All types of hole punch (2 hole, 3 hole, 4 hole,
Swedish and Legal SEF) are compatible with TAG F008.
KIT NUMBER: 604K22010
PARTS LIST ON: PL 31.10 Item 6, PL 11.6
July 2005
TAG: F009
CLASS: 4
NAME: Sharp edges removed from area 5 (safety)
PURPOSE: To make safe the customer interaction area around the hole punch.
KIT NUMBER: -
PARTS LIST ON: -
TAG: F010
CLASS: 4
NAME: 20 ohm tamper motor
PURPOSE: To eliminate the tamper motor from stalling.
KIT NUMBER: -
PARTS LIST ON: PL 11.16
TAG: F011
CLASS: 4
NAME: Re-routed harness
PURPOSE: To improve the routing of the staple harness by using a longer harness.
KIT NUMBER: -
PARTS LIST ON: -
Finisher (1K LCSS) Tags
TAG: None issued
CLASS: 5
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON: XX
July 2005
6-191 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) Finisher (HCSS) Tags, Finisher (HCSSBM) Tags
Finisher (HCSS) Tags
TAG: H002
CLASS: 5
NAME: Compiler carriage kickers
PURPOSE: The kicker eyelet wears out prematurely. Grease the kicker pivots and eyelet
where the spring makes contact. Apply Molykote EM-D110 grease to the pivots
and the eyelet.
KIT NUMBER:
TAG: H004
CLASS: 1
NAME: Lower exit gate interlock switch (S11-305B)
PURPOSE: The actuation of the lower exit gate interlock switch is not reliable. This could
result in customer injury. The new switch has a stronger actuator.
KIT NUMBER:
Finisher (HCSSBM) Tags
TAG: None issued
CLASS: 5
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON: XX
July 2005
6-192 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F) Network Controller Tags, Fax Tags
Network Controller Tags
TAG: N002
CLASS: 4
NAME: PostScript Option Kit
PURPOSE: To upgrade a Workcentre machine with updated PostScript software
KIT NUMBER:
Fax Tags
TAG: None issued
CLASS: 5
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON: XX

06 General Procedures

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

06 General Procedures

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

July 2005

6-1 WorkCentre Pro 275 Family (CC232-WCP275F)

You might also like